2024
ALPINE
COMPETITION GUIDE
1
2024 ALPINE
COMPETITION GUIDE
Managing Editor and Layout
Je Weinman
Contributors
Published by
U.S. Ski & Snowboard
PO Box 100 | 1 Victory Lane
Park City, UT 84060
usskiandsnowboard.org
Copyright 2023 by U.S. Ski & Snowboard. All rights reserved. No part of this publication
may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, or stored in a
database or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of the publisher. Printed in
the USA. Additional copies of this guide are available for $10.00 by calling 435.647.2666.
Sam Damon
Bill Gunesch
Thelma Hoessler
Chip Knight
Darlene Nolting
Paige Roberts
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Key Contact Directory 4
Alpine Field Contacts 6
Alpine Important Dates 6
Chapter 1: Getting Started 9
Athletic Advancement 10
Find More Information 11
Alpine Memberships 11
Code of Conduct 13
Athlete Safety 15
Parents 15
Insurance Coverage 16
Alpine Program Information 18
Alpine Development Pyramid 18
Regional and Divisional Rules and Procedures 19
Alpine Ski Racing Events 19
Taking Part in a Competition 20
Foreign Competitors in USA Events 20
USA Athletes Competing in another Country 21
Canadian FIS Competitions 23
Chapter 2: Points, Rankings and Selection Systems 25
Points and the Points Lists 26
Penalization of Points 31
Points List Distribution 33
Alternate Seeding Systems 33
Place Point Scales 34
Common Selection Systems 35
Chapter 3: Series and Selections 37
Olympic Winter Games 38
Alpine World Championships 38
Alpine World Cup 38
World Junior Championships 38
FIS International Children’s Competitions 38
NorAm Cup 39
U.S. Alpine Championships 40
FIS-University Competitions 41
U16 National Performance Series (NPS) 43
Regional FIS Series 44
Junior Championships 45
U.S. Alpine Ski Team 47
3
Chapter 4: Regional and Divisional Programs 49
Eastern Region 50
New Jersey Ski Racing Association 51
Maine Alpine Racing Association 51
New Hampshire Alpine Racing Association 52
New York State Ski Racing Association 52
Pennsylvania Alpine Racing Association 52
Southern Alpine Racing Association 52
Tri-State Ski Racing Association 52
Vermont Alpine Racing Association 53
Eastern Amateur Ski Education Foundation 53
Rocky/Central Region 54
Central Division 54
Rocky Mountain Division 55
Western Region 55
Alaska Division 56
Far West Division 57
Intermountain Division 57
Northern Division 58
Pacic Northwest Division 59
Chapter 5: Collegiate, Masters & Para Racing 61
Collegiate Competition 62
Masters Ski Racing 64
Para Ski Racing 65
Chapter 6: Ocials and Sport Education 67
Alpine Ocials’ Program 68
Sport Education 74
Coach Development 74
Club Development 78
Chapter 7: Alpine Competition Regulations 81
Additional Regulations 145
Course Length Recommendations 147
Course Setting Specications 148
Competition Equipment Rules 149
Para Competition Rules 152
Course Approvals 153
Concussion Checklist 156
Visit U.S. Ski & Snowboard at usskiandsnowboard.org
and FIS at s-ski.com for current calendars.
4
KEY CONTACT DIRECTORY
Unless otherwise noted, email addresses are a combination of rst name dot last name
followed by @usskiandsnowboard.org - e.g. [email protected]g.
Member Service (fax 435.647.2052)
Member Service Hotline 435.647.2666 membership@
Website usskiandsnowboard.org
National Oce
U.S. Ski & Snowboard 435.649.9090 info@
PO Box 100 | 1 Victory Lane
Park City UT 84060
Executive
Sophie Goldschmidt | President & Chief Ex. Ocer 435.647.2001 sophie.goldschmidt@
Brooke McAee | Chief Financial Ocer 435.647.2002 brooke.mcaee@
Alison Pitt | General Counsel 435.647.2004 alison.pitt@
Alpine
Patrick Riml | Alpine Program Director 435.647.2020 patrick.riml@
Chip Knight | Alpine Development Director 435.647.2074 chip.knight@
Lauren Beckos | Masters Manager 267.496.1320 lauren.beckos@
Aaron Strubel | Elite Team Manager 435.602.9256 aaron.strubel@
Ellen Tolstad | Development Team Manager ellen.tolstad@
Para Alpine and Para Snowboard
Erik Leirfallom | Para Program Director 303.579.7088 erik.leirfallom@
Athletics
Anouk Patty | Chief of Sport 650.353.6723 anouk.patty@
Competition Services
Je Weinman | Director Competition Services 435.647.2030 je.weinman@
Margo Yatkeman | Competition Services Coordinator 435.647.2037 margo.yatkeman@
Content and Creative Services
Dave Finger | Head of Content & Creative dave.nger@
Mike Dawson | Photo mike.dawson@
Cross Country
Chris Grover | Cross Country Program Director 435.640.8545 chris.grover@
Bryan Fish | Cross Country Development Director 435.640.8548 bryan.sh@
Greta Anderson | Cross Country Dev. Coach 907.244.7389 greta.anderson@
Adam St Pierre | Cross Country Sport Coordinator 720.206.6092 adam.stpierre@
Allan Serrano | Cross Country Technical Advisor 715.558.9734 [email protected]
5
Events
Eric Webster | Director of Events 435.647.2095 eric.webster@
Nick Alexakos | Event Dir. Snowboard & Freeski 435.467.2018 nick.alexakos@
Malorie Irvin | Event Dir. Alpine & Freestyle 435.602.9515 malorie.irvin@
Erin McNeely | Event Mgr. Snowboard & Freeski 435.640.3316 erin.mcneely@
Kendall Cooper | Event Mgr. Alpine & Freestyle 435.862.0885 kendall.cooper@
Karen Korfanta | Jr Champs & Alpine NorAm Coord 435.714.8193 karen.korfanta@
Foundation and Commercial Partners
Trisha Worthington | Chief Revenue & Philanthropy Ocer
435.647.2075 trisha.worthington@
Freestyle
Matt Gnoza | Freestyle Sport Director 435.602.2764 matt.gnoza@
Tami Strong | Freestyle Team Manager 435.962.1719 tami.strong@
Marketing and Communications
Guy Slattery | Chief Marketing Ocer 646.673.7386 guy.slattery@
Courtney Harkins | Director Marketing & Comms. 978.314.1019 courtney.harkins@
Leann Bentley | Communications Manager leann.bentley@
Sadie Texer | Social Media Coordinator sadie.texer@
Member Services
Sheryl Barnes | Director Member Services 435.647.2013 sheryl.barnes@
Matt Lemon | Member Services Coordinator 435.647.2609 matt.lemon@
Sharka Fabian | Member Service Representative 435.647.2099 sharka.fabian@
Ski Jumping and Nordic Combined
Anders Johnson | Ski Jumping & Nordic Combined Program Director
435.640.8419 anders.johnson@
Snowboard and Freeski
Rick Bower | Snowboard Program Director rick.bower@
Skogen Sprang | Freeski Program Director skogen.sprang@
Ashley Deibold | Sport Development Director 970.846.4906 ashley.deibold@
Julia Flake | Sport Development Coordinator julia.ake@
Sport Education
David McCann | Director Sport Education david.mccann@
Anna Hosmer | Sport Education Coordinator 435.647.2050 anna.hosmer@
Ellen Adams | Club Development Manager 435.647.2033 ellen.adams@
Sport Science
Gillian Bower | High Performance Director 435.647.2619 gillian.bower@
Dr. Jaron Santelli | Sports Medicine Director jaron.santelli@
6
ALPINE FIELD CONTACTS
Field contacts are the closest service point for members. Contact them for information on
alpine programs. Email addresses are a combination of rst name dot last name followed by
@usskiandsnowboard.org - e.g. [email protected]g
National
Chip Knight | Alpine Development Director 435.531.6325 chip.knight@
Eastern Region
usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-programs/regions-divisions/eastern-alpine-region
Sam Damon | Regional Director 435.714.2540 sam.damon@
Paige Roberts | Regional Manager 435.714.1281 paige.roberts@
Roger Kimball | Regional Coach 435.962.2672 roger.kimball@
Scott Graham | Regional Youth Coach 435.962.0545 scott.graham@
Rocky/Central Region
usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-programs/regions-divisions/rocky-central-alpine-region
Darlene Nolting | Regional Director 435.640.8510 darlene.nolting@
Patrick Mich | Central Divisional Manager 435.602.2614 patrick.mich@
Western Region
usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-programs/regions-divisions/western-alpine-region
Bill Gunesch | Regional Director 435.602.2759 bill.gunesch@
Heidi Voelker | Regional Manager heidi.voelker@
Randy Pelkey | Regional PG Coach randy.pelkey@
Brad Saxe | Regional Coach bradford.saxe@
Je Pickering | Regional Youth Coach 435.602.2866 je.pickering@
ALPINE IMPORTANT DATES
April 15 Deadline for injury protection application (no exceptions are possible)
July 1 - June 30 U.S. Ski & Snowboard membership season
Aug. 15 FIS registration - late fee applies after this date
Oct. 15 U.S. Ski & Snowboard membership renewal - late fee applies after this date
Nov. 30 Schedule agreements due - late fee applies after this date
7
2023-24 Alpine Points List Schedule
List Close Valid
1 FIS only 1 July 1 July
1 U.S. Ski & Snowboard (NAT) only 15 July 15 July
2 Both FIS and NAT 16 July 20 July
3 Both FIS and NAT 30 July 3 Aug.
4 Both FIS and NAT 13 Aug. 17 Aug.
5 Both FIS and NAT 27 Aug. 31 Aug.
6 Both FIS and NAT 10 Sept. 14 Sept.
7 Both FIS and NAT 24 Sept. 28 Sept.
8 Both FIS and NAT 8 Oct. 12 Oct.
9 Both FIS and NAT 22 Oct. 26 Oct.
10 Both FIS and NAT 5 Nov. 9 Nov.
11 Both FIS and NAT 19 Nov. 23 Nov.
12 Both FIS and NAT 3 Dec. 7 Dec.
13 Both FIS and NAT 17 Dec. 21 Dec.
14 Both FIS and NAT 31 Dec. 4 Jan.
15 Both FIS and NAT 14 Jan. 18 Jan.
16 Both FIS and NAT 28 Jan. 1 Feb.
17 Both FIS and NAT 11 Feb. 15 Feb.
18 Both FIS and NAT 25 Feb. 29 Feb.
19 Both FIS and NAT 10 Mar. 14 Mar.
20 Both FIS and NAT 24 Mar. 28 Mar.
21 Both FIS and NAT 7 Apr. 11 Apr.
22 Both FIS and NAT 30 Apr. 1 May
23 NAT only 1 June 1 June
Lists close on a Sunday and are valid the following Thursday. For FIS, to have results
included on the next list, they must be processed and validated by Monday evening after the
closing so the list can be run Tuesday in Europe. For U.S. Ski & Snowboard, to have results
included on the next list, they must be processed by Tuesday at noon MST after the closing.
Late results will be published to the next valid list after they are processed and validated.
Results should be submitted within 24 hours after the completion of the event to allow time
for processing and corrections if necessary.
Important information on list dates and registrations
To assure that your membership is processed before any list, membership materials
must be received by U.S. Ski & Snowboard at least seven days prior to any closing date.
Registrations are not considered received until they are complete. Be sure to allow time to
complete background screening, SafeSport education, and avalanche education. U.S. Ski &
Snowboard is not responsible for late, lost or misdirected mail. It is the athlete’s responsibility
to ensure that his or her U.S. Ski & Snowboard and/or FIS membership/registration is
received; contact member service to check the status of your application 435.647.2666 or
Athletes 16 years and older (by competition season age), with a valid competitor
membership, may register for FIS at any time during the season. Athletes will appear on the
next FIS list after their registration is processed.
Athletes must maintain membership with U.S. Ski & Snowboard, and with FIS as
applicable, to maintain points, even when not competing due to injury or other reasons.
8
Thank You to our Suppliers and Licensees
for supporting the athletes of
U.S. Ski & Snowboard
Atomic Auclair Sports Big Truck
Dermatone DJO Global Fischer
Giro/Bell Sports Givego Head
Hestra Gloves
HKD
Snowmaking
ID One
Kask Khombu Knockaround
Leki Level Gloves Madshus
MVD Naked Cashmere Nice Recovery
Nordica Oakley Ogio
Oofos Outdoor Master Pit Viper
POC Sports RACEtech Rayus
Reusch Rise
Rossignol/
Lange/Dynastar
Salomon SKIDA SkiDATA
Skiers Edge SkyTech sports Smith
Stockli
Sun Valley Ski
Tools (SVST)
Swany Gloves
Sweet Protection Swix & Toko Vola Wax
Wigwam
Wildhorn
Outtters
Wintersteiger
World Cup
Supply
Zanier Zipline Poles
9
CHAPTER 1
GETTING STARTED
10
U.S. Ski & Snowboard is the Olympic national governing body for ski and snowboard
sports in the USA, providing leadership and direction for tens of thousands of young skiers
and snowboarders, encouraging and supporting them in achieving excellence. By empowering
national teams, clubs, coaches, parents, ocials, volunteers and fans, U.S. Ski & Snowboard
is committed to the progression of its sports, athlete success and the value of team.
Thank you for your participation in U.S. Ski & Snowboard programs. These athletic
programs in alpine, cross country, freestyle, ski jumping, nordic combined, snowboarding
and freeskiing provide opportunities for athletes to develop skiing or snowboarding skills in a
competitive and educational environment, from grassroots club programs up through national
teams and the Olympics. This competition guide is a roadmap for various programs, rules and
rankings.
U.S. Ski & Snowboard clubs include approximately 350 professional coaching outlets
for athletes and logistical support for competitions. These clubs, with both professional
sta and volunteers, comprised of nearly 39,000 U.S. Ski & Snowboard members, are the
foundation of U.S. Ski & Snowboard, supporting individual athletes and managing most of
the organization’s domestic competitions.
Annually more than 3,100 domestic competitions with more than 171,000 athlete starts are
held across the U.S., thanks to the incredible eorts of our resort partners, clubs, ocials and
volunteers.
Services provided by U.S. Ski & Snowboard are based around the three “R’s”: rules, races
and rankings. Rules are established to ensure a consistent and fair playing eld for all athletes.
Races, or competitions, are the backbone of U.S. Ski & Snowboard’s programs, providing
competitive opportunities for athletes. Rankings are a means of evaluating performance in
competitions to determine advancement along the athlete development pipeline, or to assist
in determining start positions in specic competitions.
U.S. Ski & Snowboard provides educational resources to key constituent groups through
the USANA Center of Excellence, the organization’s national training and education facility.
Education is provided to athletes, parents, ocials, coaches and clubs in areas such as sport
technique, tness and exercise, sport science and sports medicine. U.S. Ski & Snowboard also
partners with both the U.S. Olympic & Paralympic Committee and U.S. Center for SafeSport
on education related to athlete safety.
U.S. Ski & Snowboard regions and divisions are volunteer-run programs which implement
programs within small, multi-state geographic areas, including scheduling of divisional
competitions, selection of divisional teams and training of competition ocials.
Athletic Advancement
Now that you are a U.S. Ski & Snowboard member, you have access to compete in sports
in your home area, regionally and nationally. The following are steps you can take to make
the most out of your competitive experience.
Join a Club - Linking up with a club will allow you access to the best professional coaching and
logistical support. A complete club directory is available at usskiandsnowboard.org/public-tools.
Compete - Pick the proper competition programs for your age and ability. Contact the event
organizer or your local club for entry information. U.S. Ski & Snowboard programs oer both
introductory non-scored events for youth athletes to promote skill development and fun, and
scored competitions to improve ranking.
Ranking - Compete in U.S. Ski & Snowboard scored competitions to gain a ranking, which
will be used for advancement up the athlete development pipeline. You can monitor your
ranking at usskiandsnowboard.org/public-tools/ranking.
FIS Competition - As you advance up the pipeline with your U.S. Ski & Snowboard ranking,
you may be eligible for ranking on the International Ski Federation (FIS) ranking list. Check
11
with your club coach or divisional contact for more information. FIS registration is managed
through U.S. Ski & Snowboard. You can monitor your FIS ranking and register for some USA
FIS events at usskiandsnowboard.org.
Team Selection - As you continue to advance, your ranking may qualify you for a regional
or divisional team. This includes the Junior Championships, U.S. Championships and all the
way up to the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Team.
Each U.S. Ski & Snowboard sport has a specic development pipeline
(usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-programs/pipeline) with dened action tips designed to
educate athletes in every age group as they progress in their sport.
Find More Information
As you continue competitive skiing or snowboarding, you might have questions along the
way. The following are helpful resources to guide you on your path to success.
Website - usskiandsnowboard.org is the best source of member information. Here you
will nd contact information, criteria and advancement protocol on your sport as well as
the latest in national news from your sport. You can also search the Knowledge Base at
usskiandsnowboard.org/membership for answers to many of our member’s most common
questions.
Competition Guide - This handbook is a guide for athletes, parents, coaches and ocials
that provides a roadmap to U.S. Ski & Snowboard programs, including information on rules
and rankings for your sport.
Local Club - Clubs are the heart of the sport. These organizations have the background and
knowledge to help answer most of your questions. Check your local club for information on
schedules and qualifying procedures within your division.
Regional/Divisional Contact - Each region and division for your sport has a contact
person who can help you answer questions. Contact information appears in the front of this
competition guide and at usskiandsnowboard.org.
National Oce - Every sport has full-time support sta in U.S. Ski & Snowboard’s national
oce in Park City, Utah. Contact the oce at 435.647.2666 with national membership or
ranking questions. For a quicker response, please send an email to the contact links found at
usskiandsnowboard.org.
Alpine Memberships
U.S. Ski & Snowboard oers a variety of membership opportunities depending on your
area of interest. You can join online at my.usskiandsnowboard.org. You will be issued a U.S.
Ski & Snowboard membership number immediately following membership registration. FIS
membership may take up to one week. Keep in mind that most adult memberships are placed
on pending status until all requirements have been completed.
Most adult members are required to undergo periodic Background Screening, Introduction
to Avalanches, and annual SafeSport training to activate membership (Those turning 18
within the season will also be required to complete membership requirements prior to their
membership being activated). Screening and SafeSport training are not required for short
term members and alpine masters who are not in regular contact with minor athletes.
Alpine General Non-Competitor (17 & under) $35 - (Does not include access to U.S.
Ski & Snowboard points list) The General membership is designed for an individual at the
club level who is a non-U.S. Ski & Snowboard competitor participating in activities such as
training, Buddy Werner, high school competition, community events and forerunning U.S.
Ski & Snowboard and non-U.S. Ski & Snowboard events. *If any of the events listed above
are sanctioned by U.S. Ski & Snowboard then a competitor or short-term membership is
required - with the exception of forerunning.
12
Alpine Non-Scored Athlete (14-24) $100 - (Does not include access to U.S. Ski &
Snowboard points list) Provides access to all levels of U.S. Ski & Snowboard scored and
non-scored competitions at the local, divisional, regional and national level. However, as the
name implies, it does not include access to the U.S. Ski & Snowboard points list. Non-Scored
Athlete members who are 18-24 may participate in Alpine Master’s events, excluding regional
and national championship events where they must possess an Alpine Master’s membership.
Alpine Competitor - The U.S. Ski & Snowboard Competitor membership provides access to
all levels of U.S. Ski & Snowboard scored and non-scored competitions at the local, divisional,
regional and national level. Competitor memberships include scoring on national ranking lists
as well as International Ski Federation ranking lists where appropriate (with additional FIS
license). This membership is required for FIS registration and FIS level competitions.
• Alpine Competitor U12 and under (11 & under) $100
• Alpine Competitor U14 (12-13) $125
• Alpine Competitor U16 and over (14 & over) $200 (Required for all FIS registrations
excluding Telemark and Adaptive Alpine)
Alpine Adaptive Competitor $80 - An adaptive athlete with legs, arms or vision impairments
competing in U.S. Ski & Snowboard Alpine or Adaptive Alpine events for national points. A
FIS license is required for FIS sanctioned events.
Short-Term Alpine (17 & under) $35 per day - (Does not include access to U.S. Ski &
Snowboard points list) May be used for one event per season. Events may not span more than
ve consecutive days.
Alpine FIS License (Must be born in 2007 or prior) Required for participation in FIS events.
You must hold an Alpine Competitor U16 & Over to purchase an Alpine FIS license. Short-
Term members, general members and Non-Scored Athletes are not eligible for FIS.
• $85 prior to Aug. 15 • $155 after Aug. 15
Adaptive Alpine FIS License $35 - (Must be born in 2007 or prior) Required for participation
in FIS events. You must hold an Adaptive Alpine Competitor membership to purchase an
Adaptive Alpine FIS license.
Alpine Master’s FIS License $50 - (Must be born in 1993 or prior) Required for participation
in FIS events. To hold an Alpine Master’s FIS license, you must also hold an Alpine Master’s
with Requirements or Alpine Master’s membership. Short-Term Alpine Master’s are not
eligible for FIS.
Alpine Master (18 & over) $135 - The U.S. Ski & Snowboard Masters membership gives
alpine athletes over the age of 18 access to alpine master’s events, including Master’s
Championships and its qualifying events. This membership is perfect for adult athletes who
are interested in competing with other adults domestically. International competition requires
a FIS Masters License.
Alpine Master w/Requirements (18 & over) $150 - An athlete participating in U.S. Ski
& Snowboard Alpine Masters events and/or FIS Masters events who is in regular contact
with minor athletes. Applicable for those in a position of authority over athletes or in regular
contact with athletes. International competition requires a FIS Masters License. Requirements
include background screening, SafeSport and Introduction to Avalanches training. Check
with your club to determine if this is the correct Master’s membership prior to purchase.
Alpine Coach w/Ocial (18 & over) $150 - An individual coaching athletes at the club level
and/or at U.S. Ski & Snowboard/FIS Alpine events (see guidelines for appropriate levels
of U.S. Ski & Snowboard coach certications). Required to access Level 100 clinics and
materials.
Alpine Junior Coach (15-17 years of age) $75 - The junior coach membership is a great
way for athletes to become involved in coaching programs. Junior coaches are required to
complete annual SafeSport training, and Coaching Fundamentals and the Introduction to
13
Avalanches course periodically.
Alpine Ocial (18 & over) $80 - An individual involved in ociating U.S. Ski & Snowboard
Alpine and/or FIS competitions. Required for ocial’s certications (see guidelines for
appropriate levels of ocial’s certications).
Alpine Volunteer (18 & over) $65 - (NOT permitted for use in place of a competitor
membership) The U.S. Ski & Snowboard Club Volunteer membership is designed for Board
of Directors, club administrative sta, parents and club volunteers who undertake a leadership
role in U.S. Ski & Snowboard clubs, divisions, regions and at competitions and club training
sessions. Not eligible for coach or ocial’s certications. Applicable for those in a position
of authority over or in regular contact with athletes.
CODE OF CONDUCT
Membership in U.S. Ski & Snowboard is a privilege, not a right. All U.S. Ski & Snowboard
members when participating in any U.S. Ski & Snowboard activity must agree to conduct
themselves according to U.S. Ski & Snowboard’s core values of Grit, Excellence, Team, Fun,
and Integrity, and abide by the spirit and dictates of this Code of Conduct. All members must
agree to comport themselves in a sportsmanlike manner and are responsible for their actions
while attending or participating in all U.S. Ski & Snowboard activities (including but not
limited to camps, competitions, and projects).
Sportsmanlike conduct is dened as but is not limited to: respect for competition ocials,
resort employees, fellow members, and the skiing and snowboarding public, respect for
facilities, privileges, and operating procedures, the use of courtesy and good manners,
acting responsibly and maturely, refraining from the use of profane or abusive language, and
abstinence from illegal or immoderate use of alcohol and use of illegal or banned drugs.
While participating in any U.S. Ski & Snowboard activity:
1. U.S. Ski & Snowboard members shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the International Ski
Federation (FIS) Statutes, the United States Olympic & Paralympic Committee (USOPC)
Bylaws, the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Bylaws, and this U.S. Ski & Snowboard Code of
Conduct.
2. U.S. Ski & Snowboard members shall conduct themselves at all times and in all places as
bet worthy representatives of the United States of America, the United States Olympic
Committee, U.S. Ski & Snowboard, their region, division, state or club and in accordance
with the best traditions of national and international competition.
3. U.S. Ski & Snowboard members are responsible for knowledge of and adherence to
competition rules and procedures. Members are also responsible for knowledge of and
adherence to the rules and procedures of the U.S. Ski & Snowboard national teams, camps
or other projects when participating in such.
4. U.S. Ski & Snowboard members shall maintain high standards of moral and ethical conduct,
which includes self-control and responsible behavior, consideration for the physical and
emotional well being of others, and courtesy and good manners.
5. U.S. Ski & Snowboard members shall abide by U.S. Ski & Snowboard rules and procedures
while traveling to and from and participating in ocial U.S. Ski & Snowboard activities.
6. U.S. Ski & Snowboard members shall abstain from illegal and/or immoderate consumption
of alcohol. Absolutely no consumption of alcohol is permitted for those individuals under
the age of 21. Members under 21 years of age shall not participate in gatherings involving
consumption of alcohol unless it is an ocial U.S. Ski & Snowboard or event organizer
function. Members under the age of 18 shall not use any form of nicotine including but not
limited to cigarettes, vaping, chewing tobacco, gum, and patches.
7. No U.S. Ski & Snowboard member shall violate the customs, travel or currency regulations
14
of a country while traveling with a U.S. Ski & Snowboard group or on a U.S. Ski &
Snowboard ticket.
8. No U.S. Ski & Snowboard member shall commit a criminal act.
9. No U.S. Ski & Snowboard member shall engage in any conduct that could be perceived
as harassment based upon gender, gender identity, age, race, ethnicity, national origin,
religion, disability, or sexual orientation.
10. U.S. Ski & Snowboard members will avoid profane or abusive language and disruptive
behavior. Members agree that they will not use or tolerate any racist, xenophobic,
homophobic, or transphobic language or gestures.
11. U.S. Ski & Snowboard members understand and agree that they may be drug tested at
any time, that they are subject to and will abide by the USADA Protocol for Olympic
and Paralympic Movement Testing, its Annexes, and the USOPC National Anti-Doping
Policies, and that any dispute related to the foregoing will be resolved exclusively in
arbitration pursuant to the USADA Protocol. Before taking any medications, members
must check the prohibited status at GlobalDRO.com. Also, they must be sure to download
the Supplement 411 app, or visit Supplement411.org to learn how to recognize and reduce
the risks related to supplement use. Any anti-doping questions can be directed to Athlete
Express at 866.601.2632.
12. U.S. Ski & Snowboard members agree to abide by the policies and procedures established
by the U.S. Center for SafeSport as well as U.S. Ski & Snowboard’s Minor Athlete Abuse
Prevention Policies (MAAPP).
Failure to comply with any of the above provisions may lead to disciplinary action by the
appropriate team or competition leader. Disciplinary action may include:
• Removal from the team trip or training camp
• Suspension from training and/or competition
• Elimination of coaching, travel, and other benets
• Forfeiture of U.S. Ski & Snowboard membership
U.S. Ski & Snowboard is committed to principles of fairness, due process and equal
opportunity. Members are entitled to be treated fairly and in compliance with U.S. Ski
& Snowboard’s Bylaws, policies, and procedures. Members are entitled to notice and an
opportunity for a hearing before being prevented from participating in protected competition
as that term is dened by the USOPC Bylaws. Information on the processes for grievances,
suspensions, and appeals is available at usskiandsnowboard.org.
Nothing in this Code of Conduct shall be deemed to restrict the individual freedom of
a U.S. Ski & Snowboard member in matters not involving activities in which one could
not be perceived as representing U.S. Ski & Snowboard. In choices of appearance, lifestyle,
behavior, and speech while not representing U.S. Ski & Snowboard, competitors shall have
complete freedom, provided their statements and actions do not adversely aect the name and
reputation of the U.S. Ski & Snowboard. However, in those events where one is representing
or could be perceived as representing U.S. Ski & Snowboard, U.S. Ski & Snowboard
demands that its members understand and agree to behave in a manner consistent with the
best traditions of sportsmanship and U.S. Ski & Snowboard’s core values.
For U.S. Olympic and Paralympic Trials, please see the USOPC’s Participant Rules for
Racial and Social Demonstrations available at teamusa.org.
Last revised Aug. 22, 2022
15
ATHLETE SAFETY
U.S. Ski & Snowboard is committed to athlete health, welfare and safety, and adheres
to the requirements of the U.S. Olympic & Paralympic Committee (USOPC) and the U.S.
Center for SafeSport in their eorts to promote a safe and secure environment for athletes.
The SafeSport Code & Athlete Safety requirements, including the Minor Athlete Abuse
Prevention Policy (MAAPP), apply from the grassroots level with U.S. Ski & Snowboard
member clubs, and extend to all areas of the organization, including the USANA Center of
Excellence.
All employees of U.S. Ski & Snowboard, interns, volunteers, and contractors who have
access to the Center of Excellence, or who have regular contact or are in a position of authority
over athletes, and those who have access to condential U.S. Ski & Snowboard information
related to the organization or athletes, must complete SafeSport training and background
screening before their rst day of employment, interning, volunteering, or beginning contract
work.
U.S. Ski & Snowboard member clubs are also required to implement SafeSport training
and background screening as well as the MAAPP for all of their adult participants in sports
and those who work at or with U.S. Ski & Snowboard, and at all U.S. Ski & Snowboard or
FIS-sanctioned events in the United States. These mandatory requirements include:
• Criminal background screening once every two seasons for all employees, coaches,
ocials, board members, interns, contractors, and volunteers who are in regular contact
with athletes, or in positions of authority over athletes
• All required training from the U.S. Center for SafeSport, which includes core and
refresher courses, with training required every year
• The adoption of U.S. Ski & Snowboard’s MAAPP, to limit one-on-one interactions with
athletes at all times
• Implementation and enforcement of policies, and preparation for and quick response to
random audits for compliance by the U.S. Center for SafeSport
• Completion of the introduction to avalanche course on U.S. Ski & Snowboard’s
membership platform
• Fast Start Coaching Course: Now required for Level 100 certication
These policies apply to all levels of U.S. Ski & Snowboard’s member programs. More
details regarding SafeSport and Athlete Safety are available on the U.S. Ski & Snowboard
website at usskiandsnowboard.org/safesport-athlete-safety.
Any U.S. Ski & Snowboard member club hosting a U.S. Ski & Snowboard
sanctioned event, must follow the Competition Administration Summary available at
usskiandsnowboard.org/safesport-athlete-safety/safesport-resources to ensure compliance
with required athlete safety at the event.
PARENTS
Your child is on their way to growing their career in skiing or snowboarding. Supporting
them in their endeavors is the number one way to help them achieve success. There are also
other ways to participate along the way to enhance the experience of competitive skiing and
snowboarding.
Become a volunteer - The club system exists because of the help and dedication of volunteers,
including parents and guardians of competitive athletes. A great way to be a part of the team is
to become an ocial. Parents may attend ocials clinics and work out-of-town competitions
so that they can better help with competitions at their own venues. Parents can also serve on
16
steering committees and competition committees for a sport. Contact your child’s club for
more information.
Education - U.S. Ski & Snowboard provides a variety of educational opportunities for
parents. Through usskiandsnowboard.org, local clubs and U.S. Ski & Snowboard-produced
educational resources, parents can gather information to help support their child. The U.S.
Center for SafeSport also oers education and training resources for SafeSport and the
MAAPP directed at minors, which are available on the Center’s website.
Stay involved in your child’s club - Ask questions to club leaders, look at annual reports and
attend orientation if oered. These activities will help you better understand your child’s club
and the sport development pipeline.
Follow the Parent Code of Conduct - We expect parents/guardians to conduct themselves
according to U.S. Ski & Snowboard’s core values of Grit, Excellence, Team, Fun, Integrity,
and abide by the spirit and dictates of the Parent Code of Conduct.
INSURANCE COVERAGE
U.S. Ski & Snowboard requires members to have valid and sucient primary medical/
accident insurance coverage and to accept full responsibility for understanding the provisions
of such coverage as a condition of becoming a member and participating in ocial U.S. Ski
& Snowboard training and competition. Such primary coverage must be in eect for the entire
term of the membership year in order for the member to have coverage under U.S. Ski &
Snowboard’s excess accident medical policy. Members must carry proof of primary insurance
and such proof must be available at each event so that prompt medical/hospital care can be
authorized, if needed. U.S. Ski & Snowboard provides properly registered members with
excess accident medical coverage, as follows:
Excess Accident Medical Insurance for Members
Current U.S. Ski & Snowboard members of a U.S. Ski & Snowboard Member
Club have excess accident medical coverage during sanctioned or registered events
including ocial training (as dened by the policy) at such events. Please see
usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-development/club-development/club-insurance for a detailed
description of coverage.
Excess Accident Medical Insurance for Members of a CLIP Member Club
Current U.S. Ski & Snowboard members of a U.S. Ski & Snowboard CLIP Member Club
have excess accident medical coverage during skiing and snowboarding competition, while
training to compete and conditioning to compete in ski and snowboard competition that is
supervised by a U.S. Ski & Snowboard representative and/or representative of a CLIP Member
Club, and during club activities that are supervised by a representative of a CLIP Member Club.
Please see usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-development/club-development/club-insurance for
a detailed description of coverage including a list of activities that are excluded from the
policy.
Liability Insurance Coverage
U.S. Ski & Snowboard will provide liability coverage for:
• Event Organizers with respect to their ordinary negligence if such is alleged to have
arisen in connection with competition in or conduct of sanctioned events (meaning a
Schedule Agreement has been executed) and/or activities conducted or approved by U.S.
Ski & Snowboard (including ocial training at such event as dened by the policy). Please
see usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-development/club-development/club-insurance for a
detailed description of coverage.
• CLIP Member Clubs and the members and supervisory sta of such clubs and member
coaches and ocials while acting in their capacity as such on behalf of CLIP Member
17
Clubs. Such coverage applies during (1) ski and snowboard competition, (2) while training
to compete and conditioning to compete in ski and snowboard competition that is supervised
by a U.S. Ski & Snowboard representative and/or representative of a CLIP Member Club,
and (3) during club activities that are supervised by a representative of a CLIP Member Club.
Please see usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-development/club-development/club-insurance
for a detailed description of coverage, as certain club activities are not automatically
covered.
Note: This summary provides a general overview of insurance coverage that applies to
U.S. Ski & Snowboard members. It is not a complete explanation of all policy provisions
or specics of the policy benets. No coverage is extended, and no representations are
made, other than what is stated in the actual insurance policies.
18
ALPINE PROGRAM INFORMATION
U.S. Ski & Snowboard alpine competitions are organized into general program categories
based on the needs of athletes at every level. Programs may overlap or be identied dierently
in some divisions. Details can be found in the Regional and Divisional Programs chapter and
at usskiandsnowboard.org, as well as in regional and divisional handbooks.
Alpine Development Pyramid
Athletic development in Alpine Skiing is a long-term process that starts in clubs at the local
level across the country. Emphasis throughout must be placed on free skiing, fundamental
skill development, and the successful execution of SkillsQuest content. Competition levels
progress from local to divisional, regional, national, and international as an athlete meets
performance benchmarks. Championships are held at the regional, national, and international
levels at the U14 age group and older. Invitations to elite-level development projects occur
as top-level athletes emerge in regional competition and above. More detailed information
on competition recommendations can be found in the Alpine Training System matrix at
usskiandsnowboard.org. The Training Systems provide an optimal developmental blueprint
for ski racers. They have been designed to ensure that all athlete, coach, and parent members
of U.S. Ski & Snowboard have the best possible opportunity to fulll their athletic dreams
and talent. They are based on a long-term athlete development model (LTAD) that emphasizes
age-appropriate training and competition.
19
Competition Categories
Masters Racing (non-scored) Ages 18 and up*
FIS Competitor (scored to national and to FIS lists) Ages 16 and older
Competitor (scored to national lists) Ages 12 and older
Competitor (non-scored) Ages 13 and younger
* An athlete born 2005 or earlier may compete in either masters or seeded competition or both, depending on the
rules of a specic region. He or she must have a competitor or a non-scored athlete, and a masters membership
to participate in both programs.
Age Classes
SR Ages 21 and older (born 2002 or earlier)
U21 Ages 18-20 (born 2003, 2004 or 2005)
U18 Ages 16 and 17 (born 2006 or 2007)
U16 Ages 14 and 15 (born 2008 or 2009)
U14 Ages 12 and 13 (born 2010 or 2011)
U12 Ages 10 and 11 (born 2012 or 2013)
U10 Ages 8 and 9 (born 2014 or 2015)
U8 Ages 7 and younger (born 2016 and later)
NOTE: Racers should check with their local program, or with their local oce regarding details or exceptions
that may apply. Some regions and divisions may recognize other age categories below the U8 class for awards.
Regional and Divisional Rules and Procedures
Each region and division have additional rules and procedures that apply in its respective
geographic area. An introduction to those areas can be found in the Regional and Divisional
Programs chapter and at usskiandsnowboard.org. More detailed information is available in
regional and divisional handbooks, at usskiandsnowboard.org and on regional and divisional
websites. Particularly note membership requirements in divisional organizations and
participation requirements for selection to regional and divisional teams and quotas.
Alpine Ski Racing Events
In the early days of alpine ski racing, athletes competed in only two events: downhill
and slalom. Giant slalom was added in 1950 and super G in 1983. Downhill and super G
are generally grouped together as “speed” events, with slalom and giant slalom grouped
as “technical” events. Masters racers compete primarily in technical events but also have
opportunities to race in speed events throughout the season. All race courses must meet strict
standards established and monitored by ocials of the FIS and U.S. Ski & Snowboard.
Following is a brief outline of the alpine ski racing events. For complete and specic rules,
see the rules chapter of this guide and/or the various FIS rule books.
Slalom (SL): Slalom is a timed event requiring the execution of many short, quick turns
through two dierent courses. Slalom is staged in two runs with times added together to
determine the nal nish order. The competitors are required to pass around all the gates
(poles), which alternate red/blue in color. The course is made up of various gate combinations
designed to test a skier’s skill and strategy.
Giant Slalom (GS): Giant Slalom is characterized as the event that is the easiest to nish
but requires the most technical skill to do well. Skiers race down the mountain through a
faster and more open course than in SL. Giant slalom is staged in two runs with the times
added together to determine the nal nish order.
Downhill (DH): Perhaps the most exciting event in alpine ski racing is the DH. Racers
attempt to record the fastest time during a single run on a course with a minimum number
of control gates. Speeds in masters DH sometimes exceed 70 mph. Two practice runs on the
20
course are required prior to the race. DH is the only event that requires practice runs prior to
participation in the competition.
Super G (SG): Super G is the newest of the alpine events combining the elements of speed
as in DH while integrating high-speed technical turns as in GS. Super G is contested in a
single run format; courses are set utilizing terrain variations.
Alpine Combined (AC): The Alpine Combined is a one-day event which adds the times
from one SL run and one speed run (usually SG) to determine the results.
Parallel (P): In a parallel competition athlete races side by side in an elimination format.
TAKING PART IN A COMPETITION
To participate in a competition, a racer must be eligible for competition as dened by FIS
and U.S. Ski & Snowboard and either be a member of U.S. Ski & Snowboard and FIS, or be
a member of a foreign federation and FIS. You can join online at usskiandsnowboard.org.
A fully valid U.S. Ski & Snowboard membership is required to be eligible to compete.
The sanction of events (ocial calendaring by FIS and/or U.S. Ski & Snowboard) is the
only assurance that events will be run according to the rules.
The responsibility for conrming the organizer’s acceptance of an entry belongs to the
entrant. Organizers should, but are not required, to notify racers whose entries have not been
accepted.
Many alpine events have qualication criteria that must be achieved for entry eligibility.
Refer to specic national, regional and divisional rules.
Event Entry Procedure
Entry Materials
Entry to all sanctioned competitions should be made according to the organizer’s specic
instructions. Many organizers use online entry systems, and some ask for registration in a
form specic to their needs, such as a team roster. Check with your coach or the organizer if
you are not sure how to enter the event you are interested in.
Entry Fees
Entry fees must accompany entries. Entry fees for scored competitions include a head tax,
which is collected on behalf of U.S. Ski & Snowboard, and its regions and divisions, and
forwarded by the organizers.
Entry Limits, Conditions, and Invitational Events
To control and organize the sport, U.S. Ski & Snowboard, regional and divisional
competition committees may impose entry restrictions and requirements on various events;
see the Series section later in this Guide for more information. Organizers and competition
juries may limit the number of entries in the interest of fairness, as is provided for in the rules.
Foreign Competitors in USA Events
FIS Competitions
According to the FIS rules governing competitor license (FIS ICR), a competitor may
represent only one country – that of his or her citizenship (or primary residence, in the case
of those with dual citizenship). Therefore, foreign competitors living in or attending school in
the U.S. and racing here must be licensed by their own nation.
These competitors may participate in FIS competitions in the USA to the degree
permitted by their license (dierent nations allow for dierent access), subject to FIS rules
on quotas, point cutos, and entry procedures, and subject to written notication by their
own federation. Foreign racers entering FIS events in the USA must plan with their own
21
national federation for entry into such events as the U.S. Alpine Championships, NorAms and
Junior Championships. Suitable documents must be on le with U.S. Ski & Snowboard in the
national oce authorizing entry into other USA FIS competitions.
U.S. Ski & Snowboard Competitions
The entry of foreign racers into non-FIS sanctioned events is subject to approval by U.S.
Ski & Snowboard, regional, divisional, and local organizations, and may be on an individual
or quota basis, or as special guests.
Foreign racers must be members of U.S. Ski & Snowboard to compete in non-FIS
sanctioned events. Submission of all items and payment is the responsibility of the athlete.
All foreign athletes must join as ‘X-number’ members. This categorizes them as foreign.
‘X-number’ members are subject to all national, regional and divisional rules. Those who
have FIS points shall be given initial national points equal to their valid FIS points. Athletes
who do not appear on the FIS points list shall be assigned maximum national points.
At a U.S. Ski & Snowboard Scored competition, foreign athletes who are not current
members may have their current FIS points used for seeding and to determine the race penalty
as long as all membership requirements have been met, including membership form, proof
of insurance, signature(s) and payment of money due; the athlete must join as an Alpine
Competitor to be able to use their FIS points as national points.
Note: Competition Services must be notied if FIS points are used in the calculation of a national penalty.
Foreign competitors who have current national points, and either appear on the current
national points list or have been given a points conrmation from national sta, must be
seeded with those points and those points must be used in the penalty calculation.
Note: No competitor may enter FIS events on an international license or represent a nation other than the USA
and enter national competitions on a non-“x-number” competitor membership.
Foreign National Team Status - Waiver of Fees
Competitors entering FIS events in the USA as members of national teams must be prepared
to show evidence of such membership; a valid international license does not automatically
give national team status and privilege. U.S. Ski & Snowboard reserves the right to allow
organizers to charge entry fees and lift tickets to foreign athletes in sanctioned competitions
in the USA subject to minimum personal qualications based on FIS points and/or rankings.
Generally, members of foreign national teams who are properly entered by their national
federation, and who are ranked in the top 350 in the world in one of the events being contested
should be provided with waived lifts and entries; no head tax will be due for these athletes.
Regardless of national aliation or national team status, athletes ranked in the top 100
in the world in one of the events being contested should be provided with waived lifts and
entries; no head tax will be due for these athletes. Some organizers may not be able to provide
waived lift tickets as they are passing along costs from the host resort.
USA Athletes Competing in Another Country
According to the FIS ICR, to be eligible to enter and compete in international ski events, a
competitor must have a specic ‘license’ issued by his or her own national association. In the
USA, this is referred to as an ‘international license.’
The procedure for competing in Canada is slightly dierent than for competing outside of
North America. See Canadian FIS competitions in the next section.
Except for U.S. Ski Team athletes, USA racers must make advance application and be
approved for international licensing and entry to FIS competitions outside of North America.
Itineraries must be sent to Ellen Tolstad | Alpine Development Team Manager | ellen.tolstad@
usskiandsnowboard.org, for approval to avoid conicts. Athletes or coaches interested in
foreign projects should use the online intent system at usskiandsnowboard.org.
Participation in international competitions outside the United States is a privilege subject
22
to athletic achievement and consideration of current and future appropriateness of an
individual’s representation of the USA in such competition(s).
USA competitors without a valid international license who enter, or attempt to enter,
events under conditions where such permission is required are subject to disciplinary sanction
including revocation of membership and forfeiture of results for points scoring, ranking for
team selection, etc. Further, such competitors will not be registered by U.S. Ski & Snowboard
with the FIS for a period of one full season.
Eligibility Procedures and Considerations
Access and Eligibility
• Ocially named U.S. Ski Team A, B, C and D athletes are ‘internationally licensed’
and have protected status in all international competitions, they can race whenever and
wherever they want. No athlete ranked higher than 1,000 may replace an athlete ranked
under 350 in the event being contested.
• Athletes must be alpine competitor members in good standing.
• Athletes must be FIS inscribed and appear on the valid FIS list during the period of
selection and competition.
• First year age eligible athletes (Year of Birth 2007) are not allowed to participate until the
start of the North American season.
• Entries for Olympic Winter Games, World Ski Championships, World Junior Ski
Championships, World University Games, World Cup, Europa Cup and World Junior
Championships are managed by the U.S. Ski Team and are exempt from these procedures.
Procedures
• Athletes wishing to compete outside of the USA must submit an online intent between
the rst day of the month preceding the event and 8 days prior to the rst team captains
meeting.
• Athletes can only be intended for one event on a given competition date. If athletes are
double intended, they will be pulled from all conicting events.
• Athletes who submit an intent after the 8-day deadline, or who change their in-tent between
two dierent events on the same date, will be ranked in order of FIS points after those
athletes who are already intended for the event.
• All intents will be considered nal 4 days prior to the rst team captain’s meeting, after
which time the entry will be submitted.
• Named U.S. Ski Team members have priority at any time and will be entered ahead of any
non-USST athlete who has been intended.
• Every eort is made to communicate with groups competing outside of the USA to keep
them informed of conicts and changes to protected projects.
- In the case that an event is over-subscribed, priority is based on the following:
• All U.S. Ski Team A, B, C, and D team members start per Team coaches’
discretion
• The remaining slots are allocated by:
• 50% by FIS points in the event
• 50% in order of priority
• U.S. Ski Team “special invitees”
• National and Regional Development Projects
• Club/academy projects
Note: If there are an odd number of remaining spots available, then the extra start will go to FIS points.
• National sta will enter USA athletes in all foreign competitions subject to FIS rules.
• The USA’s FIS quotas can be expanded by the authority of FIS upon request from the
23
Alpine Director within rules for making such requests.
• USA competitors residing in Europe can apply for race and they may receive protected
status. If those athletes do not apply, they will have secondary status for entry access when
teams and projects on approved itineraries are in attendance.
• The Alpine Director (AD) may make modications to these procedures based on
circumstances that eect ‘high potential’ athletes where such modications favor a
long-range development strategy. Under extraordinary conditions, the AD may exercise
discretionary placement or replacement of up to 10% of any quota.
• USA Team Captains (TC) will be assigned based on the project level (National Team,
national or regional development, Club/Academy). The TC will facilitate the above
procedures. National sta acting in the capacity of TC may use discretionary entry
designation for up to 10% of any quota for any team or group member (other than national
team A, B, C and D who are otherwise inscribed). Additionally, team captains may agree
on alternative methods if they have the unanimous consent of the attending USA coaches.
Canadian FIS Competitions
Alpine Canada Alpin (ACA) and its provincial partners organize FIS competitions in
Canada. Travel to, and competition in, Canadian events as a matter of common practice is not
encouraged.
A calendar of Canadian events can be found at s-ski.com.
Access and entries for U.S. athletes to Canadian events is through the regional sta. The
Eastern Region oce will coordinate and conrm entries for competitions in Eastern Canada
and Ontario. The Western Region oce will coordinate and conrm entries for competitions
in Western Canada.
Current FIS registration is required; there are no point restrictions for access to Canadian
competitions.
Athletes wishing to compete outside of the USA must submit an online intent between the
rst day of the month preceding the event and 21 days prior to the rst team captains meeting.
Conrmations are due 16 days in advance of the rst team captains meeting in the itinerary.
Access to Canadian FIS competition projects will be managed for athlete development;
selection of interested athletes will be both objective and subjective.
Generally, the U.S. may enter a quota of up to 15 women and 15 men in Canadian
competitions subject to the approval of the Canadian ocials involved. By agreement
with ACA, certain FIS events in each country may be subject to more rigorous, objective
qualications even if this results in quotas not being fully utilized. Development selections
by national and regional directors may be possible per the agreement with ACA. In general,
athletes who have not qualied for a series in their own country will not be eligible to
participate in the equivalent series across the border if these events have been identied for
higher objective qualication standards. (Examples: the USA and Canadian spring series).
Should more USA racers wish to enter a Canadian FIS competition than can be
accommodated, racers will be ranked as follows:
1. U.S. Ski Team,
2. By NTSM of FIS point rankings in the contested events
3. 20% of the available slots may be reserved for development selections.
Racers entered in Canadian FIS competitions must be properly represented at all team
captains’ meetings, or otherwise accounted for according to the FIS ICR, or they will be
pulled from the board. Racers entered in Canadian FIS competitions who fail to withdraw in a
timely manner, and/or who fail to start in events to which they have been entered, are subject
to sanction, including prohibition from entry into future Canadian FIS events.
24
Thank You
to our Corporate Partners for supporting
the athletes of U.S. Ski & Snowboard
25
CHAPTER 2
POINTS AND RANKINGS
26
POINTS AND THE POINTS LISTS
Ski racers are: 1) scored by total points for each seeded competition in which they nish
without disqualication, 2) ranked nationally and internationally according to their earned
total points, and 3) seeded in subsequent competitions according to their total points earned
in previous events. Thus, in ski racing, things are done “by the numbers”.
Points are used in ski racing because of the unique character of the sport: there is no
precisely dened standard eld, track, or course for the competition. To compensate for
courses of dierent length, on widely varying terrain, and on snow surfaces that can dier
considerably, the FIS legislated 1) guidelines, such as minimum vertical drop, minimum and
maximum number of gates, and gate dimensions, for the setting of courses, and 2) formulas
for assigning points by relating a racer’s time to the winner’s time.
FIS (International) and
U.S. Ski & Snowboard (National) Points
There are two related systems used to ‘score’ alpine races, rank competitors, and establish
start orders. The FIS maintains a system that includes racers registered internationally and
competing in FIS-calendared events. The FIS points list includes all racers who are properly
registered prior to the deadline for that list and assigns the top World Cup skiers to the rst
places on the lists, adjusting all other competitors accordingly. Only FIS calendared events
are scored to the FIS list.
The national points list ranks athletes with a valid competitor membership who compete in
a sanctioned event that is scored in the system; this includes most races for ages 12 and up.
The national and the FIS points systems are based on the same formula for scoring. The top
national racers will be ranked as the top USA racers in the FIS lists, as well. However, the two
point lists do dier. The most important dierence is that the minimum penalties are lower
for higher-level FIS races like National Championships, NorAm Cup and World Cup races.
Nonetheless, in both systems lower points reect better results.
Competitors who should be concerned with FIS points are those who will be competing
in a signicant number of FIS events in the current season. For these racers, progress on the
FIS points list is important. For racers who are not yet ranked at the top of their age group in
their geographic region, FIS points mean little more than national points. In either system, the
good ski racer will show points progress parallel to achievement, while the less-accomplished
competitor can only progress points-wise with the development of improved skiing skills.
How Points are Scored
Race Points + Penalty = Racer’s Result
While the winner of any seeded race is given zero (0.00) ‘race points,’ a penalty is calculated
for every event and added to each racer’s points to produce the racer’s results for that event.
The magnitude of the penalty depends upon 1) the seed points of the best ve racers who start,
2) the seed points of the best ve racers among the top ten nishers and 3) whether the times
of those ve racers are clustered near the winner’s time or relatively widely dispersed.
This procedure allows the scoring of dierent races on dierent slopes and dierent days,
each with dierent levels of competition, to be based on a common scale. In theory, every
racer in a seeded event can compare themselves against Mikaela Shirin or Ryan Cochran-
Siegle and against the best racer in the region, as well as other competitors in each event.
The average of a racer’s two best results in each of the scored events becomes the basis for
that racer’s ranking among other racers. Published lists of such rankings, ‘seed lists’, provide
the data by which race organizers and race juries can seed or establish the start order for
27
subsequent events. Thus, the circle continues: from seed list to race result to seed list; with
one aim being lower points, and better start positions, and better results.
To gain better start positions by lower seeding points, competitors also must improve their
skills, strength, and tactics and then prove this on the hill. It is a basic concept of the sport that
skiers must ski well to improve their points.
Calculation of ‘Race points’
The FIS point system of scoring ski race results was developed to recognize the better
performance of nishing fourth in one race with a time one second behind the winner, as
opposed to nishing second in another race with a time two seconds behind the winner.
Race points are determined by comparing the winner’s time and the individual racer’s time.
The formula for points makes this comparison and produces points in each event according to
the ratio of the racer’s time to the winner’s time.
The formulas for the determination of points can be worked easily on a calculator. The
formulas incorporate changes in the CM values (constants based on the average spread of race
results, excluding ‘stragglers’) to make the points earned in the various events more equal for
purposes of combined event scoring and team selections.
The formula can be stated as follows:
P = (( Tr / Tw ) - 1 ) x F
Where: P is race points
Tr is the racer’s time, in seconds
Tw is the winner’s time, in seconds
F is a constant, dierent for each event, based on the CM
according to the equation: F = 60 / (CM - 1)
‘F’ values as set by FIS are:
Downhill - 1250 Super G - 1190 Giant Slalom - 1010
Slalom - 730 Alpine Combined - 1360
For example, if the winning time in SL (F = 730) were 98.36 seconds (Tw), a racer with a
time of 102.58 seconds (Tr) would receive 31.32 race points (P). These same times produce
race points of 53.63 in DH, 43.33 in GS, 51.06 in SG and 58.35 in AC.
Calculation of ‘Penalty Points’
In calculating penalty points for a race, the results (times) are listed in ascending order for
every one of the same gender who competed on the same race course. Even if competitors
of dierent ability or age classes participated, ranking of race results must always be used to
calculate FIS and/or national race points and penalty points. Penalty points are calculated for
each race as follows:
1. Using the most recent seed list, (either FIS or national as is appropriate for the event)
determine which ve racers who started the race have the best seed points in the event. Add
the seed points of these ve racers (see “B” below).
Best ve at the start from current points list Seed Points Race Result
CHODOUNSKY, David 4.57 DNF2
KASPER, Nolan 4.83 DNF1
BRANDENBURG, Will 7.05 DNF2
FORD, Tommy 10.32 2
GREGORAK, Will 10.35 6
37.12 = B
2. Again, using the most recent seed list, determine which ve of the top ten placing racers
28
have the best points in the event. Add the seed points of these ve racers (see “A” below).
Add together the race points of these ve racers then subtract the best points of those racers
nishing in the top ten (see “C” below).
Best ten nishers Seed points Best ve Race points
current list seed points of these ve
1. GRANSTROM, Colby 10.88 10.88 0.00
2. FORD, Tommy 10.32 10.32 7.90
3. STIEGLER, Seppi 14.32 14.32 9.68
4. ANKENY, Michael 17.20
5. JITLOFF, Tim 15.57 15.57 11.11
6. GREGORAK, Will 10.35 10.35 12.89
7. TRIENDL, Armin 20.49
8. PENTTINEN, Juho-Pekka17.94
9. TARBERRY, Ace 22.93
10. WUNSCH, Taylor 20.16
61.44 = A 41.58 = C
3. Add the total of A and B, then subtract C; divide the result by ten, rounding to 100th of a
point (0-4 down, 5-9 up) - (A + B - C) / 10 = Penalty
So, in this example… (61.44 + 37.12 - 41.58) / 10 = 5.698; the race penalty = 5.70.
FIS Points Rules
FIS rules for penalty calculations are in the ‘Rules of the FIS Alpine Points’ available on
the FIS website, s-ski.com.
Rules for National Race Penalty Calculations
The following rules apply to the calculation of U.S. Ski & Snowboard (national) race
penalties.
Fewer than Ten Racers Finishing
When fewer than ten racers nish a sanctioned event and their results are submitted for
scoring, the minimum race penalty shall be DH - 180 points, SG - 135, GS - 110, SL - 100,
AC - 125, regardless of the mathematically calculated penalty. Example: a DH with eight
nishers and a calculated penalty of 142.17 would have an ocial penalty - 180.00.
Racers in First Five have National Points in Excess of Event Max
When at least ve racers nish and have valid national points, but one or more of the ve
best racers by national points has points over the maximum (DH - 820, SG - 660, GS - 530,
SL - 360, AC - 660), rst determine the racers with the ve best (lowest) valid national points.
Then assign points at the maximum for the event to all those racers whose points exceed the
maximum. Next, calculate the penalty according to the formula using these values.
Fewer than Five Racers Finish
When fewer than ve racers nish a sanctioned event and their results are submitted for
scoring, the race penalty shall be calculated as follows:
1. Insert ‘ghost’ racers as necessary to bring the total of actual nishers and ‘ghost’ racers to 5.
2. Assign each ‘ghost’ racer seed points of DH - 820, SG - 660, GS - 530, SL - 360, AC - 660.
3. Assign each ‘ghost’ racer race points equal to those of the lowest ranked (worst time)
nisher.
4. Calculate the penalty according to the formula using these assigned values.
5. No race penalty can be calculated when there are fewer than three nishers.
29
Fewer than Five Racers in First Ten with Valid Seed Points
When there are fewer than ve racers with valid points who nish in the rst ten - or in
the rst nine, eight, etc. when there are nine, eight, etc. nishers - the race penalty shall be
calculated as follows:
1. Assign points of DH - 820, SG - 660, GS - 530, SL - 360, AC - 660 to the worst ranked
competitor(s), nishing in the rst ten - or nine, eight, etc., to bring the total of racers with
points to ve including both those with valid points and those with assigned points.
2. Calculate the penalty according to the formula using these values.
Two or more Competitors are Ranked 10th
In the event where two or more competitors are ranked 10th in the race, they shall all be
taken into consideration for the penalty calculation, if they are included in the ve with the
best points.
Two or more Competitors have the Fifth Best Points
If two or more competitors have the fth best points, which should be taken into
consideration for the penalty calculation, the competitor with the higher race points will be
considered for the penalty calculation. Reason: Better penalty.
Application of Vertical Drop, Minimum Time and Minimum Penalty
When a U.S. Ski & Snowboard (national) sanctioned event is submitted for scoring:
A. The minimum penalty for a non-FIS national race is 40.00. If the calculated penalty is
lower than 40.00 the applied penalty shall be 40.00,
B. If the minimum vertical drop requirement is met, then the minimum time requirement does
not apply,
C. If the minimum vertical drop requirement is not met, then the greater of the calculated or
minimum penalty of 60.00 shall be applied,
D. If the minimum vertical drop requirement is not met, but the minimum time requirement is,
the greater of the calculated or minimum penalty of 60.00 shall be applied,
E. If the minimum vertical drop requirement and the minimum time requirement are not
met, then the greater of the calculated penalty plus the additional penalty or the minimum
penalty shall be applied.
Data by Event
Event Min VD Alternate Minimum Time Add Penalty
DH 400 m 60 seconds combined/max 2 runs (U706.2.1.1) 26.00
SL 100 m 50 seconds combined for 2 runs (U801.1) 12.00
GS 200 m 50 seconds combined for 2 runs (U901.1.1) 17.00
SG 300 m 40 seconds for 1 run (U1001.1) 21.00
Examples
1. A GS meets VD requirements, has a total time of 49.98 seconds, and has a calculated
penalty of 34.35, the applied penalty is 40.00 (minimum penalty).
2. A GS does not meet VD requirements, has a total time of 65.28 seconds, and has a
calculated penalty of 83.90: the applied penalty is 83.90 (calculated penalty).
3. A SG does not meet VD requirements, has a total time of 38.12 seconds, and a calculated
penalty of 65.45: the applied penalty is 86.45 (calculated penalty plus additional SG
penalty for races that meet neither VD nor total time).
4. A DH does not meet VD requirements, has a 2 run total time of 64.98 seconds, and a
calculated penalty of 58.95: the applied penalty is 60.00 (minimum penalty for races not
meeting VD requirement).
Technical standards (start and nish elevation) must be entered accurately in the electronic
version of the results submitted to U.S. Ski & Snowboard to ensure that races are scored
properly.
30
Penalty Manipulation
U.S. Ski & Snowboard sta can withhold from processing, or adjust results after
processing, any race that has the appearance of deliberate distortion or produces results
outside of statistical norms. Sta and the Classication Working Group will review
exceptional races and provide recommended sanctions to the Alpine Sport Committee at the
U.S. Ski & Snowboard Congress for action, including adjusting the penalty or invalidating
the competition completely.
Any competitor, ocial or coach clearly involved in articially aecting penalty points
may be disqualied or sanctioned following review by sta, the Classication Working
Group, and the Alpine Sport Committee.
Points List
The basic purposes of the points list are:
1. Measure the relative performances of all competitors in the classication system
2. Serve as a tool to seed (organize) the start order of a race
3 Provide a method of team selection.
As noted earlier, there are two seeding lists that concern U.S. Ski & Snowboard racers,
the National Points Lists and the FIS (international) Points Lists. The National Points List
is published regularly during the season (see schedule earlier in this Guide). To assist race
administrators, all valid Competitor members appear on the national points list - even those
not eligible to earn points due to their age. Only Competitor members are eligible for national
points and for FIS points (with the addition of a FIS license). An athlete is listed with 999.99
until they earn better (lower) points.
Only competitions that are scheduled as Scored competitions have points available. Some
divisions restrict the number of competitions where an athlete can earn points during the
season, and at what age an athlete is eligible for scored competitions.
How the Points List Works
In most cases, the average of the best two results in the current season, in each scored event
constitute the seed list points. As previously stated, the total points of a race are gured by
adding the race points of the racer to the penalty points for the race.
National points, as published in the Summer List (Summer points) are used as a competitor’s
current seed points (or as one of his or her best results) until two races produce average points
lower than the Summer points. When this happens, Summer points are no longer used to
calculate current seed points.
In the case of a new competitor with no Summer points, a double penalty is added to the
rst result to arrive at current seed points. For example, a new competitor earns a rst result of
193.00 points in a GS race. The penalty in this case is 20 points, doubled is 40 points. 193.00
points plus 40.00 points gives current seed points of 233.00. When a second result is obtained
the average of the two (with the penalty removed) will then appear as the current points even
if the average is greater than the best result plus penalty.
End of Season
There are ve calculations to determine the points at the end of the season: 1) if there are
at least two results, the two best results from the season* are averaged; or 2) if there is one
result, a double penalty is added to that result; or 3) if there are no results, a double penalty is
added to the previous Summer points; or 4) points per 1, 2, and 3 are compared to select the
better of ‘normally’ calculated points, or, previous Summer points plus double penalty, or 5)
a competitor is credited with the better of their FIS or national points for national ranking.
31
Zeroing of the National list to FIS - Summer Adders
National points are ‘zeroed’ each summer to bring them in line with the FIS points list so
that FIS and national points for a competitor appearing on both lists are roughly equivalent.
This is done by comparing the FIS and national points of the top USA-FIS racers in each
gender/event. The zeroing factors shall be such that the average of the national points of these
representative competitors after the factors have been added, approaches the average of the
FIS points of these competitors. The adders are applied to every racer’s points.
Base Points
The End up Season points, plus the Summer Adders become the new Base Points.
Results of Non-USA Races
Results of non-USA FIS races are entered into the Athlete Points System with the release
of each FIS list.
PENALIZATION OF POINTS
“Non-activity” Adders and Point Penalization
There is no such thing as a “point freeze”. The rules of the FIS and national points apply
adders or penalties on ‘old’ points regardless of injury situations, calendar opportunities, etc.,
so that rankings do not remain static when point holders do not compete and thereby protect
or do not ‘expose’ their points to others.
The rules for FIS and for national points are dierent. For the specic rules relating to FIS
see the Rules for the FIS Alpine Points at s-ski.com.
There are dierent levels of adders with single penalization possible in case of injury
or other specic situations when athletes have been prevented from competing; or double
penalization when no such situation exists.
Single or Double Penalties
At the end of the season, the points earned from a single result in an event are subject to a
double penalty, unless a single penalty is requested and approved. Likewise, in the absence
of any results in an event, a double penalty is applied to that season’s base or Summer points,
unless a single penalty is requested and approved.
Determining National Penalty Adders
The formula for determining the single adder (or ‘non-activity’ penalty) is based on a set
percentage of the previous points, with minimum and maximum adders according to events.
Except for single penalties, this adder is then doubled.
Event Minimum Percentage Maximum
Downhill 4 22% 26
Slalom 4 22% 14
Giant Slalom 4 22% 20
Super G 4 22% 20
Alpine Combined 4 22% 18
Examples of ‘double penalties’:
1. Single result of 45.00 points, 22% of 45.00, twice, equals 64.80
2. Base points of 12.57, plus minimum of 4.00, twice, equals 20.57
3. Base GS points of 123.45, plus 20.00 (maximum adder) twice, equals 163.45
32
Single Penalization Situations
(sickness, injury, other obligations)
Competitors who are unable to compete because of injury or illness, studies, military
obligations, or church commitments may protect their points through single penalization.
Single penalization cannot be requested for lack of calendar opportunities.
U.S. Ski & Snowboard and FIS membership must be renewed every year to maintain
points, even when an athlete has single penalty protection. FIS membership must be renewed
by June 15 to appear on the rst FIS list and maintain FIS points.
Application forms and medical certicates must be submitted by the dates listed earlier in
this book under Alpine Important Dates - there are no exceptions to the deadlines.
Injury or Illness
Single penalization is determined at the end of the season. Documentation of injury with
inability to compete information should be submitted immediately to U.S. Ski & Snowboard
Competition Services sta.
For a competitor to obtain a single penalty, he or she must submit the FIS and/or the U.S.
Ski & Snowboard Single Penalty Request forms, which include:
1. Name, FIS or national ID, and address of the athlete,
2. Time/Date and place of the accident,
3. Type of injury,
4. Athletes signature with date.
A separate Medical Certicate from the athlete’s physician detailing the injury and length
of inability to compete is also required. This letter must include the date of the injury.
Inability to compete for more than one year, due to injury or illness, will result in a single
penalty each year if requested by the athlete. Single penalization will be in addition to any
general zeroing adders or other adjustments to the total list.
Professional, Educational, Military, or Religious Obligations
Applications for single penalization due to professional obligations must be submitted
prior to the beginning of the period indicated. Later applications will not be considered.
Approval of Single Penalty Requests - national points
Single penalty applications are not automatically approved. Approval depends on the
timing of injury or illness, duration of inability to compete, and the number of starts and/or
results made (three starts or two nishes in DH or SG, or ve starts in SL or GS disqualify
single penalty requests).
Consideration and approval of national single penalty requests and forwarding of FIS
requests is the responsibility of the Competition Services sta, whose decisions are subject to
appeal in writing to the chairman of the Alpine Classication Working Group.
Approval of Single Penalty Requests - FIS points
FIS rules for single penalty can be found in the Rules for the FIS Alpine Points at
s-ski.com.
33
POINTS LIST DISTRIBUTION
General Information
Both FIS and national lists are available for download at usskiandsnowboard.org. Individual
points records may be viewed, and ranking lists may be requested by various parameters
including divisional aliation and year of birth on the website as well.
Lists are posted as soon as possible, generally one to two days prior to the valid date.
Schedule
The schedule of list closing and valid dates is located earlier in this guide.
Race Organizers and the Points Lists
Results and the List Closing Dates
Every eort will be made to include all eligible races on the points list, up to and including
those run on the closing date, however, complete and valid results must be received to be able
to include them.
Results must be submitted electronically in the FIS/U.S. Ski & Snowboard approved XML
format within 24 hours of the event completion to [email protected].
A pdf hard copy of certain documentation must also be sent to
Services after the event. For a list of required documentation see the master packet of forms.
Results received after the deadline, and results that cannot be promptly processed because
they contain errors will be processed as time permits. Any results not included will be
processed and reected only in the next list published after completion of the result package
and processing.
Results and the FIS List Closing Dates
Race organizers and TDs are responsible to ensure that electronic results are submitted, and
the online Timing & Data Technical Report (TDTR), and TD report are certied after each
day’s events.
Late results will be included in the next published list.
Racers who register with FIS through U.S. Ski & Snowboard will be inscribed to the next
list, and results after registration will be credited to the next published list.
ALTERNATE SEEDING SYSTEMS
Instead of using the national or FIS ranking list, Non-Scored and some Scored races are
seeded using approved Alternate Seeding Systems. These alternate systems must be presented
to and approved by the Alpine Sport Committee on a quadrennial basis.
Approved systems include, but are not limited to: random, team seeding, TRS, Golden
Rule, eastern modied bibbo and the Turton system.
34
PLACE POINT SCALES
World Cup & Continental Cup Points Scale
World Cup points are referred to frequently in ranking/selection procedures. According to
the scale adopted by the FIS, points are awarded by place to the rst thirty nishers according
to the following scale.
In case of a tie (identical times), each tied racer receives the points for that place, according
to the schedule. Following racers receive points according to their place.
Note: Ties will result in one, or more, vacant place(s). For example, a two-way tie for third means no 4th place
points are awarded; next points go to fth place. A three-way tie for rst would mean next place points awarded
are for fourth place.
There may be departures from this point scale but following the same general principles.
Place Points Place Points Place Points
1st 100 11th 24 21st 10
2nd 80 12th 22 22nd 9
3rd 60 13th 20 23rd 8
4th 50 14th 18 24th 7
5th 45 15th 16 25th 6
6th 40 16th 15 26th 5
7th 36 17th 14 27th 4
8th 32 18th 13 28th 3
9th 29 19th 12 29th 2
10th 26 20th 11 30th 1
Alternate Points Scale
This scale is like to the World Cup scale and is used in some Regional selections. Points
from 25 down to 1 are awarded by place from the winner to 15th as follows:
Place Points Place Points Place Points
1st 25 6th 10 11th 5
2nd 20 7th 9 12th 4
3rd 15 8th 8 13th 3
4th 12 9th 7 14th 2
5th 11 10th 6 15th 1
35
COMMON SELECTION SYSTEMS
Selection boards will not be re-ranked to reect athletes purged due to scratches, illness,
injury, etc. Points from alpine combined are not typically included in selections.
National Team Selection Method (NTSM)
Names of competitors in contention are organized by appropriate points or rankings, FIS or
national, but not mixed, in each event of the meet or series for which a team is to be selected
(or according to national/regional/divisional policies). Each event is ranked in a separate
vertical column, lowest points or best ranking on top to higher points or worst ranking on the
bottom. Duplications of the same athlete in more than one column are listed.
Selection is accomplished by proceeding across each horizontal row, choosing the lowest
points/ranking in the rst row, second lowest points/ranking in that row, third and fourth, if
appropriate, before moving down all columns to the next row. As racers are selected in one
column they are crossed out in all columns; however, lower listed racers do not move up in
their columns when duplicated names are crossed out. Example, for three-event selection,
using points in DH, SL, and GS:
DH SL GS NTSM Ranking
A - 2.50 B - 17.12 C - 5.21 A
C - 23.40 C - 23.75 B - 17.12 C
B - 24.87 D - 28.95 E - 25.93 B
F - 25.33 A - 42.74 A - 26.66 E
D - 32.00 G - 43.14 D - 30.04 D
E - 35.70 F - 44.00 G - 32.75 F
G - 38.95 H - 46.55 H - 33.40 G
If the selections were for SL and GS only, then the ranking order would be: C, B, E, D, A,
G, F. Or if for GS and DH only, then: A, C, B, E, F, D, G. If selections included SG, then a SG
column would be included in the same fashion.
International Team Selection (ITS)
ITS diers slightly from NTSM in that the order of selection from each row is xed,
determined by the order of columns, rather than according to lower/lowest points or ranking
in the row.
The order of each event is arranged into separate vertical columns, best on top, last on the
bottom. The columns are arranged normally from left to right: DH, SL, GS, SG. Selection
is accomplished by taking the top row of names (DH, SL, GS, SG) then going to the second
person in the rst column. Continue across columns. If a name comes up a second (or more
times) it is skipped. Always skip across from left to right, not down for repeats.
DH SL GS SG ITS Ranking
A E D C A
B A B B E
C B C A D
D C E E C
E D A D B
International Team Selection Method can be expanded to columns ordered by points,
by event ranking, and by a combination of results and points and/or ranking, as well (see
Regional Selection Board Method following).
36
Regional Selection Board Method
Some Regions use the Regional Selection Board Method. It is like the NTSM and ITS
methods, except that it uses both place points and seeding points to build its selection tables.
Details may vary for each team or series entry selection.
Setting up the Boards
Two selection boards are used, as follows:
1. One board is composed of ranking by place points earned in specied races/series in each
event involved. A column is established in each event with the ranking racer in that event at
the top of the column. The columns shall be arranged as prescribed by the policy for each
event, division or region.
2. The second board is setup using the valid points list, FIS or national. A column is
established for each event with the low point athlete in that event at the top of that column.
The columns shall be arranged as prescribed by the policy for each event, division, or
region, and considered in order.
Selection Procedures
Selection will be made by going across both boards choosing the best-ranked racer in every
column of each row of both boards before moving on to the next row. When a competitor
appears, who has already been selected in a previous row, selection continues across the same
row, but skipping that competitor, until the end of the row is reached, before moving to the
next row. For example:
Downhill standings in order: A, G, R, T
Slalom standings: B, D, Z, Q
Giant slalom standings: E, Q, D, B
Super G standings: D, E, Q, M
Downhill points: A, F, Z, T
Slalom Points: X, E, M, D
Giant slalom points: D, X, Q, L
Super G points: C, Z, D, Q
World Cup Point Board Seed Point Board
DH SL GS SG DH SL GS SG
A B E D A X D C
G D Q E F E X Z
R Z D Q Z M Q D
T Q B M T D L Q
Selection for a 12 person, four-event team would be:
A, B, E, D, X, C, G, Q, F, Z, R, M, T, L
Selection for a SL, GS Team would be:
B, E, X, D, Q, Z, M, L
More information on specic selection procedures used in your region or division appears in
the Regional and Divisional Programs section of this Guide or in your regional or divisional
handbook.
37
CHAPTER 3
SERIES AND SELECTIONS
38
This chapter provides general information on the major events and series, many of which
are invitational or only open to skiers qualifying by previous performance.
More details on the programs organized below the international and championship level
may be found in the regional section of the Competition Guide or on regional or divisional
websites and handbooks.
For events and series where particular qualications apply, the entry criteria, eld size and
design of the programs themselves have been designed to encourage involvement by many
skiers and to provide opportunities for talented racers to reach their full athletic potential in
alpine ski racing. Coaches and competitors are advised to check regional and divisional rules.
OLYMPIC WINTER GAMES
The 2026 Olympic Winter Games will be in Milan, Italy. Selection criteria will be available
at usskiandsnowboard.org in the fall of 2025.
ALPINE WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
The FIS Alpine World Ski Championships are held every odd-numbered year. The next
World Championships will be in Saalbach, AUT. Selection criteria will be available at
usskiandsnowboard.org in the fall of 2024.
ALPINE WORLD CUP
In contrast to the many sports where an Olympic medal serves as the only symbol of
achievement, international alpine ski racers also look to the FIS Alpine World Cup as the
measure for determining the best over a full season of racing.
World Cup winners are named at the end of every season and are determined by the number
of points accumulated in World Cup events in all alpine events and combined.
In addition to overall and event awards, a Nations’ Cup is awarded to the national team that
accumulates the most points over the course of the season, counting individual point totals of
all team members.
Schedule information for the FIS Alpine World Cup can be found at s-ski.com.
WORLD JUNIOR CHAMPIONSHIPS
The annual FIS World Junior Alpine Championships provide a unique opportunity for
the best 16-20 year-olds of the skiing world to compete together. The 2024 World Junior
Championships will be held in Haute Savoie, FRA. The World Junior Championships are
important competitions in the development of future World Cup contenders, and World
Cup skiers are usually found on the ocial entry lists. Selection criteria will be available at
usskiandsnowboard.org in the fall of 2023.
FIS INTERNATIONAL
CHILDREN’S COMPETITIONS
U.S. Ski & Snowboard may eld teams of U16 and U14 athletes to compete in FIS
International Children’s competitions through approved regional and national projects.
Projects and selection criteria will be available at usskiandsnowboard.org in the fall of 2023
39
NORAM CUP
The NorAm Cup is the most prestigious and important North American series. The ‘original’
Continental Cup and parallel to the European Cup, only a notch below the competition of the
World Cup circuit, this series has proven to be an excellent training and testing ground for
both top national racers and for developing U.S. and Canadian athletes.
The U.S. and Canadian Ski Teams are represented at all NorAm events. Foreign racers,
including World Cup contenders, often compete in these events raising the level of competition
even more. The remainder of the participants are the best competitors from the regions and
colleges of Canada and the U.S.
NorAm Cup winners are named in each of the individual events based on points
accumulated over the season according to the World Cup point scale. The overall winners
are determined by adding the points scored in all events. End of season event winners and
second-place nishers become individually qualied for World Cup participation in that event
in the following season and are entitled to special start positions in other Continental Cup
competitions in that event.
Current NorAm calendars can be found at s-ski.com.
Eligibility
For consideration to NorAms, racers must be registered to appear on the FIS points list
and must be current Competitor members in good standing with U.S. Ski & Snowboard and
their home region. For SL, GS, SG, and AC/SG events, athletes must have fewer than 100.00
FIS points in any event in order to apply for selection. For DH and AC/DH events, athletes
must have fewer than 100.00 FIS points in either DH or SG, or must have been selected to
and attended a National Development Speed project prior to the DH event. Development
nominations are exempt from these limitations.
Selection Procedures
Selection Procedures
Athletes wishing to compete in NorAm competitions must submit an online intent between
the rst day of the month preceding the event and 21 days prior to the rst team captains
meeting (where both men and women are competing in a combined series on dierent days,
the rst team captains meeting will be considered the rst meeting of that series). Participation,
and payment of entry fees, must be conrmed at least 16 days prior to the rst team captains
meeting of the competition series in question.
All athletes submitted will be ranked by NTSM in the event(s) to be contested (except AC),
using the most current FIS points list at the intent deadline.
Selection is according to the specic steps outlined below.
Canadian and other foreign entries in USA NorAms: Foreign competitors, properly entered
by their own national federations, may compete in the NorAm Cup according to the FIS rules
for Continental Cups.
Development quota: The Alpine Development Director will select athletes for the
development quota. Objective rankings, advancement history, and other discretionary factors
will be considered. Development quota selections will be made irrespective of program
aliation.
Quotas
The USA and Canada each have a quota of 60 women and 60 men for all NorAm
competitions. If either the USA or CAN does not ll its national quota, the other nation may
use those unlled spots; quotas are not always lled.
40
Women and Men
U.S. Ski Team 20
NTSM of eligible intended athletes 20
Development 20
If the men’s and/or women’s quotas are not lled above, additional athletes will be selected
in order from the NTSM of all athletes intended.
U.S. ALPINE CHAMPIONSHIPS
The U.S. Alpine Championships have long been a premier event on the calendar of alpine
ski racing events. U.S. Ski Team athletes participate, and the events can attract top-level
racers from Canada and Europe as well as the best regional and collegiate skiers.
The 2024 U.S. Alpine Championships (SL, GS, SG) will be held in Sun Valley, ID from
March 20-24. The National Championship for DH will be conducted as part of the NorAm
Cup races at Copper Mountain in December, so NorAm quotas and selections will be used for
that portion of the event.
A feature that began at the 1990 championships is the Regions’ Cup, awarded to the regional
team earning the greatest total number of World Cup points in all the national championship
events and combined. In 2005 the Regions Cup was renamed the Tom Garner Cup in memory
of Tom Garner, former Rocky/Central Director and long-time supporter of alpine ski racing.
Only USA skiers will score Region’s Cup points. U.S. Ski Team members score points for
their home region. USA collegiate athletes score points for the region where the school exists.
Each region is limited to 8 individual coaches and/or support sta (not including U.S. Ski
& Snowboard sta).
USA Quotas (in order)
Men Women
SL/GS/SG SL/GS/SG
1. U.S. Ski Team All All
2. Current-year Olympic, World Championship, World Junior Championship team members
3. Any athlete with a current top-100 world rank in a contested event
4. NorAm
1
9 9
5. Collegiate
2
13 13
6. Western
3
14 14
6. Rocky/Central
3
14 14
6. Eastern
3
14 14
7. Development
4
up to 10 up to 10
1
USA athletes, who are not already selected above, will be ranked by World Cup points in the respective series
21 days before the rst team captains’ meeting. Ties within an event will be broken by overall World Cup points
scored in the respective series. A selection will be made by NTSM in the events to be contested. Collegiate
athletes who qualify through the NorAms will be automatics in the collegiate quota.
2
Collegiate athletes who intend for the U.S. Alpine Championships will be ranked by an NTSM of FIS points
in SL and GS. Athletes must be ranked in the top-100 USA athletes in SL or GS on the FIS points list used for
selection. An athlete in the top-100 in SL or GS is eligible for all events.
3
Maximum total team size, all events: 18 men and 18 women
4
Up to 10 per gender to accommodate development nominations. Development quota should not be used to add
events for specialists.
USA athletes must be registered to appear on the current FIS Points Lists to be entered in
the U.S. Alpine Championships.
Note: When circumstances warrant, the Alpine Sport Committee, on the recommendation of sta, may apply
objective qualication standards, or may otherwise further limit entry quotas, for the DH and SG events of the
U.S. Alpine Championships, due to organizational and safety considerations. Such additional restrictions will
41
consider athlete opportunities, performance in other events, combined scoring, and other factors, and will be
announced through the regions as much in advance as possible.
Foreign Entries
Up to 25 foreign competitors per event may enter. All foreign entries, including those for
athletes attending USA colleges, universities, schools and academies, must be properly made
by the athlete’s national federation directly to U.S. Ski & Snowboard.
Entry Fees
Participation, and payment of entry fees, must be conrmed at least 16 days prior to the
rst team captains meeting of the competition series in question.
Regional Selection Procedures
Each region lls its entry quota according to its own rules, subject to national guidelines.
Please consult the regional chapter, handbooks, and websites for more information.
Regional racers entered on development quota shall represent their regions and function as
part of their regional group; they shall not be counted against their region’s quota.
College Quota
Team-roster varsity collegiate athletes according to procedures established by the Collegiate
Working Group ll the college quota. Athletes must apply through the online intent system
between the rst day of the month preceding the event and the last NorAm or NPS event that is
more than 21 days prior to the rst team captains meeting. Athletes must conrm participation
at least 16 days prior to the rst team captains meeting. After the conrmation deadline, the
college quota will be closed, and all subsequent entries must go through either the regional or
development quotas. Selected college athletes will be entered by the respective region.
FIS-UNIVERSITY COMPETITIONS
FIS-University (FISU) competitions are a category of FIS racing that allows for special
quotas and rules to create additional opportunities for competitors who are also college or
university students.
The qualication as a university student is determined by FISU art. 128.01.03. Competitors
must be older than 16 and less than 25 years.
In the USA FISU competitions are additionally categorized as either:
1. FIS-University Open competitions
2. FIS-University Team Series competitions
Quotas and Entries
FIS-University Open competitions
1. USA FIS-University qualied skiers.
2. Nations Quota: All nations have a quota of up to 12 university students. Of the 12 a
maximum of 4 skiers who are not university students may be entered. In the USA, CAN
and NOR have a quota of 20 of which a maximum of 4 skiers who are not university
students may be entered
3. Host Nation Quota. The host nation may ll the remainder of the eld, with university
or non-university skiers, up to the maximum eld size as determined by the Organizing
Committee, not to exceed 140 per gender.
FIS-University Team, and FIS-University Series competitions
1. Varsity teams as dened by the hosting college conference, EISA, RMISA or USCSA
2. Nations Quota: All nations have a quota of up to 12 university students. Of the 12 a
maximum of 4 skiers who are not university students may be entered. In the USA, CAN
and NOR have a quota of 20 of which a maximum of 4 skiers who are not university
students may be entered
42
3. Host Nation Quota. The host nation may ll the remainder of the eld, with university
or non-university skiers, up to the maximum eld size as determined by the Organizing
Committee, not to exceed 140 per gender.
For EISA FIS-University Series competitions
a. The U.S. Ski & Snowboard (national) quota will be a minimum of 10 women and 10 men.
b. The total national quota of 20 can be split between women and men with a maximum of
15 per gender.
c. The host shall have the ability to expand the national quota with approval from the EISA
Executive Committee, at least 16 days prior to the rst competition based on favorable
conditions and a limited eld size.
National Quota Entry Procedures
1. Non-FISU eligible athletes wishing to compete in FISU competitions must submit an
online intent between the rst day of the month preceding the event and 21 days prior to
the rst team captains meeting (where both men and women are competing in a combined
series on dierent days, the rst team captains meeting will be considered the rst meeting
of that series). Participation, and payment of fees, must be conrmed at least 16 days prior
to the rst team captains meeting of the competition series in question.
2. Athletes who have expressed interest will be ranked using an NTSM of FIS points in the
event(s) to be contested.
3. USA athletes who are older than 24 years old, can participate in FIS-U races as part of
the host nation quota. That quota will be expanded to accommodate athletes who are
participating as part of their collegiate team.
4. Up to 20% of the USA quota may be used for development to be managed by the regional
development directors.
FIS-University Series Rules
For Open FIS-University and Team Series University competitions the FIS ICR rules for
FIS category competitions apply.
For FIS-University Team Series in EISA and RMISA competitions a modied Continental
Cup seeding and starting order are utilized.
Referencing the 2013-14 Continental Cup Rules
3 Starting Order
3.1 First Group (1-15)
The rst group (1-15) will be determined based on the respective Cup points, (the EISA
or RMISA FISU Start Lists). In the case of a points tie for 7th (SL/GS) or 15th place (all
events), the group will be appropriately expanded. If there are not 15 competitors with
respective FISU Start List points, then the rst group comprises only the competitors with
respective Cup points.
3.1.1 Choice of Starting Numbers/Draw
GS/SL:1st group (1-15)
The rst group is sub-divided into two groups: (1-7) and (8-15). The start numbers are then
drawn by double-draw from within these groups
3.1.3 Validity of Cup Points
The nal event ranking in the respective FISU Start List is used as a race result with
validity dened in art 3.1.4 in the next season.
The rst ranked has 100 points, the 30th ranked has 1 point. This ranking determines
the rst 30 competitors for the rst race of the season. For the rst race, if there are not
30 competitors present who appear on the basic list, the missing places will be lled by
continuation of the previous season’s nal event standings.
The respective FISU Start List points achieved from the rst race onwards in each event
43
will be added to the basic list to determine the new ranking.
3.1.4 Validity of the Basic List
After the second race in that event in the current season, the basic list will be deleted.
3.2 After the First Group
After the First Group, the competitors start according to art. 3.2.1 Special Group.
The following 15 competitors of the respective FISU Start List start according to the
respective FISU Start List event standing unless they are within one of the two above
mentioned groups.
The remaining competitors will start according to their FIS points in that event.
3.2.1 Special Group
Competitors with the lowest 5 FIS points in that event may start after the First Group unless
they have the right to start in the rst 15.
3.3.1 Limitation of the second run in SL and GS
The ROC may determine at the Team Captains meeting that only the rst 60 competitors
who complete the rst run are qualied.
U16 NATIONAL
PERFORMANCE SERIES (NPS)
The 2024 U16 National Performance Series will be held at Burke Mountain, VT from
Jan. 8-12. This event brings U16 athletes together from across the country and focuses on
exposure to high-level training and racing environments to benet long-term development.
The best performing athletes from the races will qualify to represent the U.S. at the OPA
Cup competition in Europe, scheduled for Mar. 5-7. Selection criteria will be available at
usskiandsnowboard.org and as part of the announcement for the U16 NPS event.
Quotas
Men Women
National
1
6 6
Western 7 7
Rocky/Central 7 7
Eastern 7 7
Development Up to 3 Up to 3
1
6 boys and 6 girls ranked nationally using 2023 U16 Nationals results
• YOB 2007’s will be purged and WC points are reassigned to YOB 2008
• Athletes will be ranked by total WC points in SL, GS, and SG
• The top 6 athletes will be selected from that list
• Ties will be broken by the most WC points in an event to be trained and/or contested.
If a tie still exists, the next most WC points will be considered until the tie is broken. If
necessary, all events will be considered.
• Foreign athletes can qualify to compete in the U16 National Performance Series through
published national quotas. For each qualied foreign athlete, the published quotas will
extend to the next U.S. athlete. Foreign athletes are not eligible for regional quotas or
discretionary development selections.
Athletes qualifying for and participating in National European projects through the U16
NPS Series will be automatics to their respective Regional Junior Championships and to U16
National Championships. These athletes will count towards their Divisional quotas for their
Regional Championships but will not count towards their region’s quota to U16 National
Championships.
44
REGIONAL FIS SERIES
In addition to the major national events like the NorAms, U.S. Alpine Championships, and
the Junior Championships, U.S. Ski & Snowboard conducts local competitions.
Each region structures its series within the framework of FIS and national policy. Most
events are open to racers from other regions and divisions per quotas and are open to foreign
skiers, depending on the entry rules. To control the size of the elds in these events, the
regional competition committees establish quotas and selection procedures per Alpine Sports
Committee policies. Most regions incorporate the results of these circuits into their selection
procedures for higher-level competitions. There are no expanded quotas for visiting regions.
Additional athletes must be considered under the Alpine Development Director quota.
Consult each regional website and rules for details of the various regional FIS series.
Each region will calendar a tier 1 level of “elite” competition to include up to 22 starts: 8
SL, 8 GS, 4 SG, and 2 DH. The racing blocks will be planned during national spring meetings
with the other two regions and calendared to be contested at similar times. Each region will
also calendar a tier 2 level of “development” competition at the divisional or multi-divisional
level. Each region will develop and maintain its own quotas and procedures to allow for
qualication from the “development” level to the “elite” level of FIS competition.
Regional FIS Quotas, Selections, Entries
Quotas
U.S. Ski Team All
Foreign entries Per FIS ICR
Host region 55 men / 55 women
Visiting regions 10 men / 10 women
Alpine Development Director 10 men / 10 women
Racers wishing to enter FIS events out of their own region must be entered by their home
regional oce.
To ensure that out-of-region racers are competitive in the eld that they are entering, the
regional director may use discretion to restrict the entry of racers from their region into out-
of-region events, especially when there is no dened qualication procedure.
Athletes wishing to compete in out-of-division or out-of-region competitions must submit
online intent between the rst day of the month preceding the event and 21 days prior to the
rst team captains meeting (where both men and women are competing in a combined series
on dierent days, the rst team captains meeting will be considered the rst meeting of that
series). Participation, and payment of fees, must be conrmed at least 16 days prior to the rst
team captains meeting of the competition series in question. Ocial entries will be due 24
hours prior to the rst team captains meeting.
Regional/divisional oces may establish procedures to collect appropriate funds from the
individual competitors entered by that region. In the event of mitigating circumstances, ‘force
majeure’, the regional director will determine if and how any exceptions to these policies
should be allowed, on a case-by-case basis.
If all divisions and regions are within quota(s) and a Regional FIS competition is
oversubscribed, all USA athletes in the event are subject to being pulled from the seeding
board. The various regions have procedures in place to bring the event into eld size
compliance. No USA athlete will be pulled from a second event in a series until all USA
athletes have been pulled from one event in the series.
For events where the eld size must be restricted to a total of fewer than 100, for example,
events with men’s and women’s DHs on the same venue, the host region determines the
acceptable eld size, reducing the host region entries accordingly. (Any necessary reduction
45
below this announced ‘target’ eld would be made as in the preceding paragraph.)
Racers who enter out-of-division events and fail to attend or to formally withdraw their
entries via the alpine oce serving the location of competition should expect disciplinary
sanction from their own region and may be barred from future entry to out-of-division events
including NorAms, U.S. Alpine Championships, FIS competitions, and Junior Championships.
Entries should be withdrawn as soon as racers are aware of their change of plans.
JUNIOR CHAMPIONSHIPS
U.S. Ski & Snowboard, in cooperation with the regions and sites, has organized the Junior
Championships into a highly competitive series.
The Alpine Junior Championships provide a championship incentive for junior athletes
from 12-20 years of age.
Eligibility
Event Membership Type FIS
U18 Competitor membership Registered
U16 Competitor membership NA
U14 Competitor membership NA
Athletes are eligible to compete only in the Regional Championships event in their Region.
The Alpine Junior Championships are limited to athletes who qualify through regional
procedures. Canada has been granted a quota of 5 men and 5 women to each of the regional
U16 championships.
Athletes who have been approved to ski up by the Alpine Development Director may
participate in a junior championship that they would not normally be eligible for based upon
their year of birth.
Foreign Athletes
Foreign athletes can qualify to compete in U.S. Ski & Snowboard national junior
championships through published regional quotas. For each qualied foreign athlete, the
published quotas will extend to the next U.S. athlete. Foreign athletes are not eligible for
discretionary development selections.
Quotas
Each region lls its entry quota according to its own rules, subject to national guidelines.
Please consult the regional chapter, handbooks, and websites for more information.
Contacts
Contact your regional sta for information on the Junior Championship program.
U18 National Championships
(ages 16-17: YOB 2006 - 2007)
The 2024 U18 National Championships will be held in Jackson, WY from Mar. 2-8.
Athletes will be selected to the U18 National Championships by selection procedures in their
home region. This event will focus development eorts on the top 16-17 year-olds and serve
as a building block toward performance at the NorAms and World Junior Championships.
The U18 National Championships includes a Regions Cup. This Regions Cup will be
calculated like the FIS World Junior Championship Hodler Cup where the top 10 nishers
in each event (SL, GS, SG, and DH (overall is not included)) are awarded place points from
10 for the winner to 1 for 10th place. Foreign athletes will be purged from the results for this
ranking. The region with the highest total place points at the end of the Championship will be
awarded the regions cup.
46
The accredited coaching and sta delegation from each region is limited to 10 coaches and/
or support sta (not including U.S. Ski & Snowboard sta).
Selection
U18 Automatics:
• U.S. Ski Team athletes
• Athletes scoring one or more NorAm points in DH, SL, GS, or SG
• U18 Automatics will be counted within their respective region’s quota
U18 Regional Quotas:
• Regional quotas must have at least 6 rst year U18 athletes
• Regions will determine their selection method
• Head to head selection is encouraged
• If regions are using points in their selection method, they must use national points
Quotas
Men Women
Western 20 20
Rocky/Central 20 20
Eastern 20 20
Development up to 10 up to 10
U16 National Championships
(ages 14-15: YOB 2008 to 2009)
The 2024 U16 National Championships will be held at Vail, CO from Mar. 31 - Apr. 4.
Athletes will be selected to the U16 National Championships through performance at the U16
Regional Championships.
The best performing U15 (YOB 2009) athletes from the races will qualify to represent the
U.S. at the Whistler Cup competition in Canada, scheduled for April 11-14. Selection criteria
will be available at usskiandsnowboard.org and as part of the announcement for the U16
Nationals event
Selection
1. Athletes qualied and attended the National U16 European projects. These athletes will not
count towards their region’s quota.
2. A ranking list will be made by adding the World Cup points of the best two results from
SG, GS, and SL at the respective U16 Regional Championships. If one or more Regional
Championships competitions are canceled, the ranking will be made by adding the World
Cup points of the best result per event from the remaining contested competitions across
SG, GS, and SL. Ties will be broken by using the single best result. If a tie still exists, the
next best result would be used, and this process will continue until the tie is broken.
3. There are discretion spots available if needed. Request for discretion must come from the
regional directors and coaches to the Alpine Development Director.
Quotas
1. 15 girls and 15 boys per region from the Regional Championships ranking. Athletes
qualied and attended the National European project will not count towards their Regions
quota
Seeding
U16 Nationals will utilize the TRS method of random seeding, with the SG event
randomized separately from the technical events of GS and SL.
47
U16 Regional Championships
(ages 14-15: YOB 2008 and 2009)
The U16 Regional Junior Championships are held in each of the three alpine regions.
Each region lls its entry quota according to its own rules, subject to national guidelines.
Please consult the regional chapter, handbooks, and websites for more information. Divisional
quotas to the Regional Championships must reect current gender populations.
U14 Regional Championships
(ages 12-13: YOB 2010 and 2011)
The U14 Regional Junior Championships are held in each of the three alpine regions.
Each region lls its entry quota according to its own rules, subject to national guidelines.
Please consult the regional chapter, handbooks, and websites for more information. Divisional
quotas to the Regional Championships must reect current gender populations
U.S. ALPINE SKI TEAM
The U.S. Ski Team represents the highest level of competition in the USA. The Team is
comprised of the best skiers who compete annually in competitions around the globe. Top
athletes from the Team take part in Olympic and World Championship competition.
The Team consists of athletes who all had their start years ago in local ski programs. They
have advanced through local competitions to divisional and regional junior competitions, to
international events in North America and then overseas and, ultimately, qualifying through
published criteria for the Team.
The Team trains and elds athletes in international competitions to achieve sustained
international excellence. The Team’s successes are gauged by Olympic and World
Championship medals, World Cup podiums, and season-long World Cup titles. Success in
these events is the focus and primary goal of the Team.
Criteria for nomination to the Team is reviewed yearly. The nominating criteria looks at
success in international competitions and how the athletes are ranked against all other athletes
in the world.
Nomination criteria for the U.S. Alpine Ski Team is available at usskiandsnowboard.org.
48
If anything goes wrong, in a country, at any time –
we have plans in place and support behind us with
Global Rescue. One phone call takes care of it all.
Tiger Shaw
Former President and CEO,
U.S. Ski & Snowboard
Learn more about Global Rescue at
info.globalrescue.com/usss2
TRUSTED BY U.S. SKI
& SNOWBOARD,
AVAILABLE TO YOU.
49
CHAPTER 4
REGIONAL AND
DIVISIONAL PROGRAMS
50
This chapter of the Alpine Competition Guide provides information on competition
programs within each U.S. Ski & Snowboard alpine region and division. Contact information
for alpine eld sta is in the front of this guide.
EASTERN REGION
The Eastern Region is one of three regions established under the authority of the U.S. Ski
& Snowboard Alpine Sport Committee (ASC) and responsible for the regulation of alpine
ski competition within the geographical area of the Eastern United States. It consists of eight
divisions: Maine (MARA), New Hampshire (NHARA), New Jersey (NJSRA), New York
(NYSSRA), Pennsylvania (PARA), Southern (SARA: NC, VA, WV), Tri-State (TSASRA:
CT, MA, RI) and Vermont (VARA).
The Eastern Alpine Competition Committee establishes the regional policies, procedures
and operating rules for the Eastern Region. The region schedules all FIS races and Junior
Championship competitions in the East, elds teams for NorAms and U.S. National
Championship events, conducts development projects for regional athletes, and schedules
other training camps and racing opportunities to assist athletic development within the
pipeline of U.S. Ski & Snowboard development plan.
Mission Statement
The Mission of the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Eastern Alpine Region is to provide the
programs, leadership, and resources necessary to enable our athletes to achieve their ski
racing potential.
Vision Statement
The Vision of the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Eastern Alpine Region is to be the strongest
development program in the world.
Eastern Regional Sta email @usskiandsnowboard.org
usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-programs/regions-divisions/eastern-alpine-region
Sam Damon | Regional Director 435.714.2540 sam.damon@
Paige Roberts | Regional Manager 435.714.1281 paige.roberts@
Roger Kimball | Regional Coach 435.962.2672 roger.kimball@
Scott Graham | Regional Youth Dev. Coach 435.962.0545 scott.graham@
Eastern Alpine Competition Committee
Chair: Dan Marshall, NHARA MARA: Laurel Lashar
Vice Chair: John Norton, NYSSRA NHARA: Andrew Gannon
Secretary: Rebecca Bell, NHARA NJSRA: Art Tokle
Development: Tom Sell, VARA NYSSRA: Stephen Mergenthaler
Children’s Racing: Diane Roe, VARA PARA: Sam Ganow
Ocials: Laura Sullivan, TSASRA SARA: Sean McKee
Athlete: Julia Ford, NHARA TSASRA: Bruce Diamond
Athlete: Kyle Penny, VARA VARA: Julie Woodworth
Athlete: Leanne Smith, NHARA *Emeritus: Horst Weber, NYSSRA
Athlete: Brennan Smith, NHARA *College: John Dwyer, NHARA
At-Large: Schone Malliet, NJSRA *EASEF: Mike Davenport
At-Large: Dan Chayes, PARA *High School: Dan Marshall, NHARA
(*Non-voting)
Additional Information
Complete Eastern policies and procedures are available in the Eastern Region Handbook
posted on the eastern region website at usskiandsnowboard.org. This website also includes
51
information on governance, regional contacts, regional programs, selections, standings, code
of conduct, and the regional competition calendar, as well as other information for athletes,
coaches, ocials, and clubs.
EASTERN DIVISIONS
Most lower level competition in the Eastern Region is organized through the eight Eastern
Divisions. Membership in one division is required. See the Eastern Region Handbook for
more details. Divisions may set rules, require membership, develop schedules and series, and
ll quotas subject to national approval. All racers are responsible for being properly registered
to compete and qualify for events.
Competitors must be members in good standing with their respective division to be eligible
for qualifying series, quota-based invitational and Eastern region events, divisional teams and
Junior Championships, scored series, and divisional awards.
Racers and coaches should be familiar with their division’s program. Many divisions
publish newsletters or guides of their own which explain in detail their specic programs.
The following listing provides key contacts if you need more information in your area.
New Jersey Ski Racing Association - NJSRA
NJSRA membership renewals are automatically invoiced through U.S. Ski & Snowboard.
New NJSRA members should indicate New Jersey as their state aliation and enclose
the appropriate NJSRA dues along with their national fees. The New Jersey Ski Racing
Association organizes alpine competition in New Jersey, selects racers to represent the state
in regional competition. The organization runs and governs all local State Championship race
events and selects State Team members based on their results in Championship Qualifying
races. Races are scheduled for all racers, SR through U10, and we support and promote a
Masters race schedule as well.
The NJSRA membership fee is $30 for racers and $15 for coaches. Members are to renew
and/or join NJSRA with their national membership. Renewing members are to sign up no
later than Oct. 15 to avoid late fees. Following Oct. 15 NJSRA membership fees will be $50
for athletes and $35 for coaches. For additional membership information and a New Jersey
Competition Guide, contact New Jersey Ski Racing Association | Box 265, McAfee NJ 07428
| [email protected] | njsra.org.
Maine Alpine Racing Association - MARA
MARA membership renewals are automatically invoiced through U.S. Ski & Snowboard.
New MARA members should indicate Maine as their state aliation and enclose the
appropriate MARA dues along with their national fees. Foreign competitors may indicate
their aliation with Maine and include MARA dues with national dues for processing, or,
may send MARA dues directly to MARA, 3012 Brackett Brook Rd, Carrabassett Valley ME
04947.
The MARA membership fee is $50 for coach and competitor members through U14, and it
is $25 for competitor members U12 and younger. Renewing MARA members (except U10s
and younger) should add a $20 late fee for renewals postmarked after Oct. 15. Active TD’s
receive waived MARA membership. MARA welcomes contributions from ocials, parents,
and other supporters of alpine racing in Maine.
For further information, visit MARA at skimara.org - or write to MARA, Laurel Lashar |
3012 Brackett Brook Rd, Carrabassett Valley ME 04947 | tel. 207.265.6886 | fax. 207.237.3026
52
New Hampshire Alpine Racing Assoc. - NHARA
Membership in the New Hampshire Alpine Racing Association is open to competitors
of all ages and abilities and to coaches, ocials, parents, and supporters with an interest
in alpine ski racing. The state program is outlined in the NHARA Handbook, available at
nhalpine.org. NHARA membership applications for returning scored and un-scored athletes
must be submitted by Oct. 15 of the competition season to avoid a late fee. For information
and membership applications contact Laurie Stevens | lauriestevens@roadrunner.com |
603.540.9831 | NHARA, PO Box 1344, Campton NH 03223 or Bev Oliver | [email protected]
| 982.482.6384 | 31 Mohawk Road, Andover MA 01810, or visit nhalpine.org.
New York State Ski Racing Assoc. - NYSSRA
NYSSRA welcomes all athletes, coaches, and ocials interested in the sport of alpine ski
racing. NYSSRA organizes numerous events each year for athletes age 8 and up across the
state which culminate in State Championships for U14, U16, and U18+. The 41st Empire
State Winter Games will be held in Lake Placid, NY in early February for U16 and up. This
prestigious event will include SG, GS and SL events for athletes who qualify through the
Empire Cup Series.
Membership is open to all and is required for all athletes who compete in NYSSRA events
as well as all participating coaches and ocials. Membership is done online and can be
accessed at nyssra.org. The deadline is October 15, after which a late fee may apply.
The NYSSRA Competition Guide, which describes our programs for all age groups is
available at nyssra.org in November. Up to date race schedule information for all age groups
is also available on our website. For additional information contact Alpine Sports Director,
Stephen Mergenthaler | [email protected]g | 518.524.3328 | 34 Beech Hill Circle, Lake Placid
NY 12946, or Administrative Director, Alicia Farone | [email protected] | 518.545.8221 | 717
Lake Ave., Saratoga Springs NY 12866.
Pennsylvania Alpine Racing Assoc. - PARA
The Pennsylvania Alpine Racing Association is open to competitors of all ages and abilities,
coaches, ocials, parents, and supporters with an interest in alpine ski racing. Membership
applications, programs, rules, qualication procedures, race schedules, and links to online
race registration may be found at paracing.org.
The PARA individual membership fee is $35 for racers and members-at-large; it is $5 for
coaches and alpine ocials. Membership renewals must be received no later than Oct. 15 of
the competition season to avoid late fees.
For additional information and membership applications visit PARA at paracing.org or
contact David Bond | [email protected] | 908.859.0192.
Southern Alpine Racing Association - SARA
The Southern Alpine Racing Association is open to all residents of Virginia, West Virginia,
North Carolina, and South Carolina, Georgia and people in surrounding areas who enjoy
skiing in our area. SARA welcomes any person with an interest in the sport of alpine ski
racing. Parents of racers and volunteers are also encouraged to join. For more information
about SARA and to apply for membership, visit sararacing.org. You may also contact Sean
“Stumpy” McKee | stumpy@skisugar.com | 828.387.0173.
Tri-State Alpine Ski Racing Assoc. (MA, CT, RI)
The Tri-State Alpine Ski Racing (TSASRA) Programs are open to all residents of MA,
CT, and RI according to regional rules. Membership fees are Competitors $30, Masters $15,
Coaches and Ocials $15. Members are to renew and/or join TSASRA with their national
53
membership. Renewing members are to sign up no later than Oct. 15 to avoid late fees.
TSASRA late fee is $10. For more information regarding Tri-State membership, programs,
rules and qualifying procedures, contact Laura Sullivan | Tri-State Administrator | PO Box 176,
Cummington MA 01026 | [email protected] or visit tristateskiracing.org.
Vermont Alpine Racing Association (VARA)
Vision of VARA
The vision of VARA is to keep ski racing 1st in Vermont and Vermont ski racers 1st in the
world.
Mission of VARA
To support VARA’s Vision by creating programs that are athletically and educationally
based, which will facilitate the development of Vermont skiers into world-class medalists and
lifelong enthusiasts of the sport.
Membership
Twenty-one active clubs and academies within Vermont strive to create cutting-edge al-
pine development programs for their members and students. All club or academy participants
U8 and older who are competing in Vermont must join VARA.
The Vermont Alpine Racing Association is open to alpine competitors of all ages and
abilities and people with an interest in alpine ski racing. Competitors, coaches, Vermont
clubs/programs/academies, and alpine ocials are required to join VARA. Parents and
volunteers are encouraged to join VARA as supporting members. Membership registration
can be completed online at vara.org/join-vara.php. There is a late fee applied after Oct. 15 for
renewing members.
For more information about VARA, please visit vara.org or contact Julie Woodworth |
[email protected] | 802.236.4695 | PO Box 774, Woodstock VT 05091.
Eastern Amateur Ski Educational Foundation
The Eastern Amateur Ski Educational Foundation (EASEF) is a fund that has been
established to benet the development of competitive skiing. It is a 501(c)3 non-prot
organization that supports alpine, cross country, jumping, freestyle, and snowboard
development programs in the Eastern Region. A special alpine account has been set up to
benet our eastern athletes. Specically, funds raised for alpine are spent to directly reduce
the costs to the athletes, by supporting competitor travel to national and international events,
and to training camps and similar opportunities.
EASEF relies entirely on contributions for the support it provides our athletes and
programs. If you want to help Eastern alpine competitors, we guarantee that any contribution
earmarked “Alpine” will do just that.
Eastern skiers need your help more than ever. EASEF can make a dierence for those who
have the ability to ski but not necessarily the ability to pay. From U16s to Junior Championship
and NorAm racers, our skiers need nancial support. Make your tax-deductible contribution
to EASEF, PO Box 430, Intervale NH 03845.
54
ROCKY/CENTRAL REGION
The U.S. Ski & Snowboard Rocky Mountain/Central Region is comprised of the Rocky
Mountain and Central divisions. The Rocky/Central Alpine Competition Committee (ACC)
is the governing body for the region. Regional selection procedures, championship events,
regional development programs, and regional scheduling are designed and approved by the
Rocky/Central ACC. Regional development programs are designed to assist the top athletes
in the region at each age level.
Rocky/Central Regional Sta - email @usskiandsnowboard.org
usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-programs/regions-divisions/rocky-central-alpine-region
Darlene Nolting | Regional Director 435.640.8510 darlene.nolting@
Patrick Mich | Divisional Manager 435.602.2614 patrick.mich@
Rocky/Central Alpine Competition Committee
Casey Puckett Rocky Don Stellin - Chair Central
John Hale Rocky James Jensen Central
Stefan Hughes Rocky John Mandereld Central
Aldo Radamus Rocky Teagan Olin Central
Tyler Shepherd Rocky Skip Wipson Central
Bill Slattery - non-voting emeritus
For comprehensive information on Rocky/Central Regional policies and procedures and
other regional information such as selection procedures, forms, race calendars, and teams, see
usskiandsnowboard.org.
ROCKY/CENTRAL DIVISIONS
Central Division
The Central Division of U.S. Ski & Snowboard is part of the Rocky/Central Region.
The mission of the Central Division is to provide the highest quality racing and training
opportunities for Central athletes that will help them achieve their highest potential as
individuals and ski racers. Central Division supports the vision of U.S. Ski & Snowboard
to become the best in the world in ski racing. Central Division will achieve its mission by
creating and maintaining comprehensive athlete development programs to support clubs
with their emerging athletes, and by organizing world-class events with recognition for
achievement and participation.
Membership Requirements
Central Division racers must complete their national membership registration and designate
Central when completing their online membership at usskiandsnowboard.org. Central athletes
must also register with their respective regions (see below) at the same time as the U.S. Ski &
Snowboard membership. New members must contact their central regional administrator for
information.
Central Division Boundaries
Central Division alpine racing program is divided into four local regions. They are:
CR1 Minnesota; North and South Dakota; Iowa west of Route 63
CR2 Upper Peninsula of Michigan west of Route 77; Wisconsin; Iowa east of
Route 63; Illinois and Missouri
CR3 Lower Peninsula of Michigan; Upper Peninsula of Michigan east of Route 77
Athletes must compete in the region where they reside and train. If there are extenuating
55
circumstances that prevent an athlete from competing in the region in which they reside and
train, that athlete must petition the division for change in regional aliation.
Regional Contacts
CR1 skifast.com
11329 State Hwy 24 NW | Annndale MN 55302
1851 Division St | East Troy WI 53120
CR3 region3cussa.org
1920 Blossom Trail | Manistee MI 49660
For information on governance, schedules, rules, and regulations visit Central Division at
usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-programs/regions-divisions/rocky-central-alpine-region.
Rocky Mountain Division
The purpose of the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Rocky Mountain Division is to provide the best
opportunities possible for all competitors to ski race and pursue personal athletic goals. One
of Rocky Mountain Division’s main objectives includes improving the quality of competition
in the USA and the Rocky Mountain region. The program is structured to allow exible
administration of competitions and competitors with special consideration given to race
location, travel, education coordination, ability and age classications, and economics.
For comprehensive information on the Rocky Mountain Division policies and procedures
and other divisional information such as selection procedures, forms, race calendars, and
teams, refer to the Rocky Mountain Division website at usskiandsnowboard.org.
WESTERN REGION
The Western Region is one of three regions established under the authority of the Alpine
Sport Committee and responsible for the regulation of alpine ski competition within the
geographical area of the western United States. It consists of ve western divisions: Alaska,
Far West, Intermountain, Northern and Pacic Northwest.
The Western Region Alpine Competition Committee establishes the regional policies,
procedures and operating rules for the Western Region. The region schedules all FIS races
and Junior Championship competitions in the West for each season, elds teams for NorAms,
the U.S. Alpine Championships, and other events, conducts a series of development projects
for regional and divisional athletes, and names a Regional Team - the Western Elite Ski
Team (W.E.S.T.) - whose members the region assists in their development within the athletic
pipeline of U.S. Ski & Snowboard and the Regional Alpine Development program.
Mission Statement
The Mission of the Western Region ACC is to:
1. Promote elite level alpine competition within the boundaries of the Western Region,
recognizing the region’s role at the elite level and the division’s roles at the entry level and
club levels of the sport.
2. Coordinate the eorts of the ve divisions within the Western Region in areas of common
interest, concern, and responsibility.
3. Promote the development of elite athletes from the ve divisions of the Western Region.
4. Maintain a governance structure that provides for the collective needs of the ve western
divisions, and represents the ve western divisions to the Alpine Sport Committee.
56
Western Website
The complete policies and procedures for Western Region programs are available at
usskiandsnowboard.org. Included are sections on:
• Western Region Governance including Ocers and Alpine Sport Committee Members
• Operational Rules
• Western Region Appeals Committee
• Regional Programs
• Western Region Team
• Western Race Events
• Western Quotas and Selection Procedures
• Junior Championship Procedures
• Regional Awards
• Project information and registration forms
• FIS and Junior Championship series results
Regional Sta email @usskiandsnowboard.org
usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-programs/regions-divisions/western-alpine-region
Bill Gunesch | Regional Director 435.602.2759 bill.gunesch@
Heidi Voelker | Regional Manager 435.513.3321 heidi.voelker@
Randy Pelkey| Regional PG Coach randy.pelkey@
Brad Saxe | Regional Coach 541.645.5641 bradford.saxe@
Je Pickering | Regional Junior Coach 435.602.2866 je.pickering@
Western Region ACC Ocers
WESTERN DIVISIONS
Alaska Division
Ski competition within the Alaska Division is administered by the Alaska Alpine
Competition Committee (ACC), which is comprised of representatives from each member
club. The ACC coordinates race schedules and development programs, establishes competition
guidelines, and makes team selections for regional and national events.
Divisional Rules and Procedures
All athletes are required to be current members of U.S. Ski & Snowboard and hold a current
alpine competitor membership to compete in sanctioned competitions. The complete rules and
procedures governing the conduct of Alaska Division are in the current AK Division Policies
and Procedures Competition Manual published annually and posted at alaskaalpine.com.
Contact
Natalie Osborne, ACC Administrator, [email protected] | 907.223.0858 | 321 W.
Cottonwood, Hailey, ID 83333. More information at alaskaalpine.com.
Finances
An athlete’s divisional and national nancial obligations must be paid prior to the athlete’s
departure for out-of-division or championship competition.
57
Far West Division
Alpine ski competition in the Far West, including California, Nevada, and Hawaii is
organized and conducted by Far West Skiing (FWS). Far West competitors are subject to the
guidelines of U.S. Ski & Snowboard and FIS.
FWS Mission Statement
The Mission of Far West Skiing is to:
1. Promote participation and enthusiasm in alpine competition in the Far West from entry
level, club level, and elite level to retain competitors and support skiing as a lifelong sport.
2. Provide nancial support to athletes, coaches and development projects
3. Not benet or serve the needs of any particular competitor or ski program, but rather strives
to sanction fairly run competitive programs for the benet of all of its members.
4. Maintain a structure that will support the needs of Far West clubs, athletes, coaches and
general membership
5. Promote the skiing development of young athletes from all clubs in the Far West with the
objective of winning races at all levels.
Divisional Rules and Procedures
Membership with U.S. Ski & Snowboard (USSS) and Far West Skiing (FWS) is required
for all athletes, coaches and ocials participating in Far West races.
The complete rules and procedures governing the conduct of the Far West program is in
the current Far West Skiing Policies and Procedures Competition Manual published by FWS
annually and is posted at fwskiing.org.
Administration
The Far West Skiing Board of Directors (FWBOD) is responsible for conducting and
overseeing the business of Far West Skiing. The administration of alpine competition in the
Far West is the responsibility of the Far West Skiing Alpine Competition Committee (FWS
ACC). The Alpine Competition Committee (ACC) is a committee of Far West Skiing and
as such reports to the FWBOD. Various subcommittees of the FWS ACC, each headed by a
chairperson, actively oversee the dierent competition areas. The subcommittees work out
proposals and policies, which are discussed and ne-tuned by the FWS ACC for presentation
and approval by the FWS FWBOD.
FWS maintains an 11-month oce to support the needs of Far West competitors,
coaches, ocials, volunteers, and clubs. The FWS oce coordinates Far West issues, such
as: dissemination of information to clubs and programs regarding race schedules, racer
qualication, selection to traveling teams, coaches’ and ocials’ clinics; support of FWS
ACC and FWBOD; FW traveling team arrangements; Far West Ski Team, Far West website,
nancial records, fund-raising, etc.
All pertinent information, including schedules, selection lists and the policies and
procedures, are posted at fwskiing.org and facebook.com/farwestskiing. For questions
or further information, please see fwskiing.org or contact the FWS administrator Kayla
Wieczorek | [email protected] | 530.721.1929.
Intermountain Division
The Intermountain Division Alpine (IMD) involves alpine teams or programs from Utah,
southern Idaho, and southwestern Wyoming. IMD is structured into the Northern Section,
teams from Idaho and Wyoming, and the Southern Section, teams from Utah. Within the
two sections, junior racing events may dier in age group involvement, access, and quota
selections for IMD wide events. This structure allows for more local racing at the grassroots
level and divisional events for the more competitive levels. IMD elds single quotas to
Western Regional events including WRJC, U16 Regional Championships, U14 Regional
58
Championships and WR FIS competitions, along with Tri-Divisional Championships.
Access to IMD races for out of division athletes and access for IMD athletes to out of
division races, beyond those where an IMD quota is selected, requires permission of the IMD
Director and the governing body in the other region and division. Athletes wishing to access
out of division FIS races, that IMD does not have a quota for must adhere to the policies of
the Western Region.
IMD is organized and conducted by the IMD Alpine Competition Committee and the
Intermountain Director, in conjunction with the Western Region of U.S. Ski & Snowboard
and the Alpine Sport Committee. IMD competitors are subject to the applicable rules and
guidelines of U.S. Ski & Snowboard and the FIS.
IMD Alpine maintains a divisional oce to support the needs of the divisional membership.
For questions regarding IMD policies, programs and general information refer to the IMD
Alpine Handbook posted at imdalpine.org or contact the Divisional Director, Carma Q.
Burnett | [email protected]g | 208.412.8565 or contact IMD ACC Chairman, Bridger Call
| [email protected] | 307.413.7034. The IMD oce mailing address is PO Box 850 | McCall ID
83638.
Membership Requirements
Membership with U.S. Ski & Snowboard is required for participation in all IMD
races. An alpine competitor membership is required for participation for U16 and older
racers. A U14 membership is required to compete in the Junior Intermountain Cup / U14
series. U10 and U12 memberships are available for participating in non-scored races. An
IMD membership is required for Alpine General memberships. In addition to a national
membership, an IMD membership is required for all IMD athletes who wish to participate
in IMD sanctioned events. Join at usskiandsnowboard.org or contact Member Services at
[email protected] | 435.647.2666.
IMD Club Membership Requirements
All clubs with athletes participating in sanctioned IMD races must register with the
Intermountain Division. The IMD Club fee is $65 before Oct. 15th and $100 after Oct. 15.
IMD Membership Fees
Class Until Oct. 15 After Oct. 15
Alpine General memberships $5 $5
U14 and younger memberships $35 $50
Alpine Competitor (U16 and older) $80 $80
2023 IMD Annual Awards
• Bryce Astle IMC Overall – Jack Homman, Rowmark | Dyllan Guay, Park City
• Steve Bounous Award – Finnegan Donley, Sun Valley | Madison Kaiserman, Park City
• Alan Hayes Intermountain Scholarship – Townsend Mikell, Snowbird
• Nick Lewis Coach of the Year – Charlotte Gourlay, Sun Valley
• Steve Schowengerdt Volunteer of the Year –Sean O’Connor, Snowbird
• IMD Ocial of the Year – Roger Paulman, Snowbird
Northern Division
Alpine competition in Montana, Yellowstone National Park, and in the northern Wyoming
counties of Park, Hot Springs, Big Horn, Washakie, Sheridan, Johnson, Campbell, Crook
Weston, Converse, and South Dakota west of the Missouri River is organized by Northern
Division within the framework of U.S. Ski & Snowboard, FIS and Western Region
programs, procedures and rules. The Northern Division board of directors, through its Alpine
Competition Committee, coordinates and supervises activities in the area. For the name of the
ski program in your area visit the Northern Division at northerndivision.org.
59
For questions contact the Northern Division Manager at the telephone number listed below
and on the Northern Division website northerndivision.org. Volunteers working with Western
Region sta conduct Northern programs. Information and rules on Northern Division can be
found at northerndivision.org.
Questions regarding Northern Division can be directed to the Northern Division President,
Tim Hinderman | [email protected] or Erin Renna | [email protected].
Membership
Membership with U.S. Ski & Snowboard is a requirement for participation in all Northern
Division Races and based on age class. Racers must have a national membership before they
will be able to purchase a Northern membership.
Membership applications are available online at usskiandsnowboard.org.
Northern Membership Fees
Class Until Oct. 15 After Oct. 15
Alpine Competitor U16 & Over $50 $60
Alpine Competitor U14 $36 $46
Alpine Competitor U12 & Under $30 $40
Alpine General $12
Short Term and Short Term Foreign $ 7
Alpine Coaches (ACO) $30
Alpine Junior Coach (AJCO) $20
The complete rules and procedures governing the conduct of Northern Division programs
are in the Northern Division Handbook available at northerndivision.org.
Northern Division Administrator
Erin Renna | [email protected]| 406.58000816
131 Candle Lane | Bozeman MT 59715
Pacic Northwest Division
Ski competition in the Pacic Northwest area of the USA, including Oregon, Washington,
and Northern Idaho is organized and conducted by the Pacic Northwest Division (PNW)
under the guidelines of FIS, U.S. Ski & Snowboard and Western Region programs, policies
and procedures.
PNW divisional rules apply to all PNW members. For more specic information about
PNW rules, procedures, and policies, please refer to the PNW Alpine Competition Manual
which can be found, along with more information, at pnwdivision.org (also linkable through
usskiandsnowboard.org).
509.445.4454.
Membership
Membership with U.S. Ski & Snowboard is a requirement for participation in all PNW
calendared races. In addition to national membership, the PNW membership fee is:
Alpine Competitor U16 & Over $50
Alpine Competitor U14 $50
Alpine Competitor U12 & Under $25
Alpine Masters $25
Alpine Coach $25
Alpine Ocial / GM / Volunteer $ 5
Out of Division Racers in PNW Events
Racers from other divisions are welcome to compete in PNW calendared races to the extent
compatible with eld size restrictions. Western Region racers should contact their divisional
60
oce at least two weeks prior to the race. Racers from outside the Western Region will need
the permission of their divisional manager and the Western Region manager at least three
weeks (21 days) before contacting PNW. The racer must meet qualications of the PNW race
series being entered.
Pacic NW Ski Education Foundation
The Pacic NW Ski Education Foundation (PNWSEF) was established in 1969. The
Foundation provides funding to oset costs for Al-pine and Nordic racers, coaches and
ocial’s education and the development of high-quality race venues in the Pacic Northwest.
PNWSEF is a 501(c)3 non-prot organization. Contributions to PNWSEF are tax deductible.
As the costs of ski racing continue to increase, we endeavor to support the athletes, coaches
and clubs in the Pacic Northwest. Help us, help them and donate today! Let’s keep ski racing
in the great Pacic Northwest strong. To donate, go to our website: pnwsef.org or mail a
check to PNWSEF, 1329 Section Ave, Quincy WA 98848.
61
CHAPTER 5
COLLEGIATE, MASTERS AND
ADAPTIVE RACING
62
COLLEGIATE COMPETITION
Collegiate ski competition is an important part of the sport in the USA and has made
great contributions to the development of and participation of athletes in alpine skiing. Top
international racers have emerged from various collegiate programs. College competition
remains a viable part of the athlete development pipeline. Collegiate team skiing provides
tremendous opportunities for junior competitors to continue ski racing while pursuing goals
in education.
College circuits have been as competitive as major events, in some years rivaling even
the U.S. Championships for public attention. There are two national collegiate programs: the
National Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA) and the U.S. Collegiate Ski & Snowboard
Association (USCSA). Both intertwine with U.S. Ski & Snowboard working through its
Collegiate Working Group.
The NCAA oers the traditional college carnival circuit in the East (EISA-Eastern
Intercollegiate Ski Association) and in the Rockies (RMISA-Rocky Mountain Intercollegiate
Ski Association) leading to the NCAA Skiing Championships. NCAA skiing has long been
tied to regional/divisional programs, and top NCAA athletes are among the top racers in their
regions and in the country.
The USCSA oers programs from full-varsity teams to club sports teams. Organized into
11 conferences, the USCSA provides opportunities for athletes to qualify to one of the ve
regional championships leading to the USCSA Championships.
The various college leagues are independent organizations, running events under their own
authority and organization. To coordinate activities, representatives of college and school
groups have been invited to join the policy-making process at many levels.
Scoring to National Points List
College athletes who are competitor members have access to the national points list, and
many college meets are scored for national points. To be scored to that list, they must follow
the same procedures as any other event, including calendaring, calendar fees, head tax, and
result submission.
Some college meets are organized as FIS-University events, where FIS points and
international rankings may be achieved.
Colleges wishing to have races scored should contact the respective regional sta.
College Quota
U.S. Ski & Snowboard provides a quota for top collegiate skiers to participate in the
U.S. Alpine Championships. The college quota is available only to athletes on an ocial
collegiate team roster, recognized by NCAA, USCSA, and U.S. Ski & Snowboard, with a
valid competitor membership. FIS registration is required for NorAms and the U.S. Alpine
Championships. Athletes must be ranked in the top-100 USA athletes on the FIS points lists
used for the selection in the event(s) to be contested.
College skiers who are interested in these opportunities must submit an online intent
between the rst day of the month preceding the event and 21 days prior to the rst team
captains meeting (where both men and women are competing in a combined series on
dierent days, the rst team captains meeting will be considered the rst meeting of that
series). Participation, and payment of entry fees, must be conrmed at least 16 days prior to
the rst team captains meeting of the competition series in question. Selections for each event
will be made according to procedures established by the Collegiate Working Group.
63
FIS-University Quotas, Entries, Calendar
Information on quotas, entries, and calendars for the FIS-University events is in the Series
and Selection chapter. USA racers eligible according to FIS-U rules may compete in events in
Europe. These events are listed on the FIS calendar and are scored for FIS points.
National Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA)
The NCAA’s purpose is to initiate, stimulate and improve intercollegiate athletics programs
for students and to promote and develop educational leadership, physical tness, athletic
excellence and athletic participation as a recreational pursuit, and to cooperate with other
amateur athletic organizations in promoting and conducting athletic events.
The NCAA Championships are held annually. Eight events are currently contested in each
NCAA meet, four for men and four for women. The two alpine events are SL and GS while
cross country skiers compete in an individual skating and mass start classical race. The points
earned by both the male and female skiers are combined to determine the order of team nish.
This makes the male and female skiers equal, a rare occurrence in sports today.
Team skiing is emphasized in NCAA meets with a school’s best three (out of three) racers
counting for team points. However, qualifying for the NCAA Championships is done on
an individual basis by earning a top result in one’s respective Eastern or Western collegiate
circuit.
All NCAA ski teams are varsity level sports sponsored by each school’s respective athletic
department. Many teams provide scholarship aid to their athletes, a budget that pays for travel
expenses, and the highest level of professional coaching. Most NCAA coaches are members
of and have received education through U.S. Ski & Snowboard. All NCAA events are scored
for national points and these events traditionally have point penalties second only to the U.S.
Championships and NorAms.
For athletes planning on attending school, it is very important to be aware of NCAA
eligibility rules. For more info on NCAA eligibility and requirements contact any college
coach, the NCAA rules compliance ocer at most colleges and universities, call the NCAA
Eligibility Hotline at 800.638.3731, or check ncaa.org.
U.S. Collegiate Ski & Snowboard Association (USCSA)
The United States Collegiate Ski & Snowboard Association is the sports federation for
collegiate team ski racing and snowboarding in America. You can be part of a team at any
college in the United States. The USCSA has an alpine, cross country, freestyle, jumping or
snowboard collegiate competition program for you.
The USCSA assures that student/athletes of all abilities have access to a quality and exciting
venue of competition. The USCSA also recognizes, that for athletes to be truly successful
individuals, academics should take priority over competition. To help foster this, the USCSA
stresses education rst and oers a variety of academic based awards.
The USCSA includes 145 colleges and universities from coast to coast, elding some
4,900 men and women, competing in over 200 alpine, cross country and snowboarding
events annually. Competition takes place across three progressive tiers. Conference qualiers
determine the participants at the six USCSA Regional Championships. The Regional
Championships are the last step on the road to the annual U. S. Collegiate Skiing and
Snowboard Championships, the showcase event in college ski and snowboard competition.
Team performance is emphasized within the USCSA, a departure from the typical
individual or world cup scoring format in skiing. Teams eld ve racers with the top three
performances being used for the team score. Most former USCSA athletes agree that the
USCSA’s team orientation has been the seed for developing and nurturing a team approach in
other aspects of their lives and careers.
64
Overall team performance is considered separately for each event, so a college can eld
any single or combination of a women’s alpine, men’s alpine, women’s cross country, men’s
cross country, women’s snowboarding, men’s snowboarding, women’s freestyle, men’s
freestyle, women’s jumping and men’s jumping.
The USCSA actively promotes the development of new collegiate programs. If your school
does not have a competition program, the USCSA will assist you in developing one at your
school. For a free brochure and college directory, contact the USCSA National Oce.
Collegiate Contacts
For more information on collegiate programs visit the following websites:
ncaa.org uscsa.com eisaskiing.org rmisaskiing.com
MASTERS SKI RACING
U.S. Ski & Snowboard’s Alpine Masters membership provides continued access to high
level adult alpine racing in all disciplines on full length FIS approved courses. For racers
completing their high school, junior or college race programs, masters is ski racing’s next
step. For others, masters provides opportunities to return to a sport from their youth or expand
their recreational ski abilities. For masters racers, the passion for the sport and urge to compete
are still alive. Masters racing is both a competitive and a social experience. Athletes and
coaches 18 and older with a Competitor, Coaches or Non Scored student membership may
add-on a masters membership and participate in masters competitions. Those with Ocials
or Volunteer memberships can add a Masters membership for an additional fee.
Masters compete in regional programs across the nation, for divisional and national age
class and overall titles. Racers 18 to 29 to compete as a group in age class 1 and those 30
and over divide themselves into ve-year categories through class 14 for racers 90 and over.
Masters provides the highest level adult competition in the country. There are over 200
masters races held annually at 50 plus resorts in 21 states.
Masters racing is a social gathering on and o the race hill. Competitors come from diverse
backgrounds, with a common interest: ski racing. Masters racing oers the opportunity to
compete against pioneers and players in the ski industry, former world cup, national team, and
Olympic racers, college athletes, captains of industry seasoned expert skiers, and multi-sport
enthusiasts, all looking to challenge themselves and chase their passion.
Each masters racer brings his or her own goals and initiative to the slopes. Many ski
areas have extensive programs surrounding the masters, including regular training and club
activities. Those new to the program nd that the drive to compete and improve is contagious
and that the camaraderie on and o the hill will keep them coming back for more. Life-long
relationships are quickly formed with new friends of all ages and abilities across the country.
U.S. Ski & Snowboard organizes masters programs with sta through an invaluable
network of committed volunteers across the country who manage regional masters competition
programs. U.S. Ski & Snowboard processes memberships, basic fulllment, specic program
endorsement, bodies of rules, coordination of competition sanctioning, provision of liability
insurance for organizers and ocials, and the generation of information and communication.
Competitors receive regular email updates, a fall newsletter, special oers from suppliers,
and the opportunity to become involved in ski racing as a coach or ocial.
U.S. Ski & Snowboard Masters membership allows competitors to compete sanctioned
masters races in any region. Masters can compete in international events as a part of the FIS
Masters Cup with an additional FIS Masters license.
For more information about alpine masters ski racing, contact our masters manager
usskiandsnowboard.org/masters.
65
PARA SKI RACING
Adaptive skiing started in pre-World War II Europe and is now highly developed throughout
the world. The sport began as a rehabilitation/recreation program which, over time, evolved
into well-organized national and international level competitions with corresponding
organizations to administer the sport.
The rst documented Championships for skiers with an impairment was held in Badgastein,
Austria, in 1948 with 17 athletes taking part. Since 1950, events have been held around the
world. Elite level racing for adaptive skiers has existed in the United States since 1972.
The rst Paralympic Winter Games took place in Örnsköldsvik in Sweden in 1976 and
featured two alpine disciplines - slalom and giant slalom. Downhill was added to the
Paralympic programme in 1984 in Innsbruck, Austria, and super-G was added in 1994 at
Lillehammer, Norway. Sit-skiing was introduced as a demonstration sport at the Innsbruck
1984 Paralympics and became a medal event at the Nagano 1998 Games.
Domestic and International level Para Alpine athletes compete in the same events as their
able bodied counterparts; Slalom, Giant Slalom, Super Giant Slalom, Downhill, and Super
Combined or a team/parallel event.
Today the major events internationally are the FIS Para World Cup, FIS Para World
Championships and the Paralympic Winter Games.
In 2023, the management of Para Alpine returned to US Ski & Snowboard after 13 years
under the United States Olympic and Paralympic Committee.
Sport Class and Classication
Classication provides a structure for Paralympic competition. The athletes are separated
into dierent categories based on their type of mobility. Those categories are: Standing,
Sitting, Visually impaired. Within each category, the athletes are more specically classied
based on their level of disability. Classication denes who is eligible to compete in Para
sport, and groups eligible athletes into sport classes according to their activity limitation.
Classication of an athlete happens at a sanctioned Classication event which is attached to
a competition. for Alpine, the classiers must observe that athlete as part of the classication
process. Classication is a medical related process performed by trained and certied Sport
Medical professionals and not related to the Sport in Rules or Committee.
Classication systems are dened and implemented by the respective International
Federation for each sport. Sport class criteria and parameters are dened and put in place by
each sport’s International Federation (IF) with the aim of minimizing the impact of impairment
and to ensure that winning is determined by skill, tness, power, endurance, tactical ability
and mental focus, etc., the same factors that account for success in sport for athletes who are
able-bodied.
More information on Classication and its process can be found at
paralympic.org/classication.
Eligible Impairments for Para Alpine Skiing
All athletes in Para alpine skiing have one or more of the following impairments:
• Impaired Muscle Power
• Limb Deciency
• Leg Length Dierence
• Hypertonia
• Ataxia
• Athetosis
• Impaired Passive Range of Movement
• Vision Impairment
66
Sport Classes in Para Alpine Skiing
Athletes in Para alpine skiing are grouped into the following sport classes. The sport class
proles are set out in FIS Para Classication Rules and Regulations.
Sport Classes LW 1-9: Standing Skiers
Lower limb impairments:
• Sport Class LW 1: Athletes have an impairment in both legs.
• Sport Class LW 2: Athletes have an impairment in one leg.
• Sport Class LW 3: Athletes have an impairment in both legs.
• Sport Class LW 4: Athletes have an impairment in one leg.
Upper limb impairments:
• Sport Class LW 5/7: Athletes have an impairment in both arms and compete without ski
poles.
• Sport Class LW 6/8: Athletes have an impairment in one arm and compete with one ski
pole.
Combined upper and lower limb impairments:
• Sport Class LW 9: Skiers in this Sport Class have an impairment that aects arms and
legs. Depending on the nature and degree of their activity limitation they compete with or
two skis and one or two poles.
Sport Classes LW 10-12: Sit-Skiers
• Sport Classes LW 10-12: All sit-skiers have an impairment aecting their legs and
compete in a seated position.
Sport Classes B1-3: Skiers with Vision Impairment
• Sport Classes B 1-3: Athletes in these sport classes have vision impairment and meet
the minimum impairment criteria to compete. Athletes with vision impairment ski with a
guide, who verbally gives directions to the athlete.
67
CHAPTER 6
OFFICIALS AND
SPORT EDUCATION
68
U.S. Ski & Snowboard competition programs provide aspiring athletes with an opportunity
for fun, excitement and a chance to achieve a dream. The success of athletes is enhanced by
the way in which those competitions are conducted, and the training and support athletes
receive from coaches and ocials.
Education of coaches, athletes, competition ocials, and parents is of utmost importance
to the future success of U.S. athletes. This chapter of the Alpine Competition Guide takes a
brief look at U.S. Ski & Snowboard ocials and coaches’ education programs.
ALPINE OFFICIALS’ PROGRAM
Ski race ociating is a service function, beneting U.S. Ski & Snowboard, the ski club,
and the individual competitors. The rewards are similar to those of other volunteer groups; the
satisfaction of accomplishment and a feeling of well-being from having added to a program
that would not exist without the help of hundreds and thousands of dedicated volunteer
ocials.
Certication of an alpine ocial by FIS or U.S. Ski & Snowboard implies that an ocial is
qualied, thoughtful, and conscientious. The listing of an alpine ocial at the more advanced
levels does not constitute a progression through prociency tests or merit badges, but rather
it represents recognition of proven judgment, ability and service.
New ocials will have no designation until promoted by the U.S. Ski & Snowboard
Alpine Ocials (AO) Committee or its representatives. Some divisions require additional
membership fees. These fees help defray the costs of additional services provided to ocials
and race organizers in those regions, according to the programs established by the divisional
AO committees.
Code of Conduct
Alpine ski race ocials are generally volunteers, giving freely of their time, often at
personal expense. Nonetheless, high standards of judgment and competence are expected of
certied ocials whose actions set an example for others in the sport.
The hallmarks of good ocials are promptness, fairness, and justice, tempered by tact and
consideration. All actions and behavior will reect on the entire sport.
Technical delegates and referees are charged with seeing that the rules are followed. They
must exercise reasonable judgment and discretion, insisting upon compliance with major
issues, especially those concerning competitor protection.
Alpine ocials should use restraint; suggest rather than order, use tact and persuasion
rather than force. Knowledge and experience should support the position of the ocial.
Alpine ocials represent all levels of U.S. Ski & Snowboard to the ski area, the sponsoring
organization, the racers, coaches, parents and the public. Their words and behavior should
be tempered to create the best possible impression of fairness, competence, and knowledge,
thereby assuring a rewarding and enjoyable competition for all.
Ocials, like athletes and coaches, should know and understand the U.S. Ski & Snowboard
Code of Conduct, which may be found later in this Guide.
Race Organization
The organizing committee of the sponsoring club or association is responsible for the
overall conduct of an event. For high-level events, the FIS ICR (rule book) notes that the
organizing committee should have a chair, a secretary and various subcommittees, each in
charge of an aspect of the event. Finances, board and lodging, trac control, press relations,
ceremony and prizes, medical service and security are some of the non-technical areas of
concern at a major FIS event. These functions are often combined and handled as a matter of
69
course at races below the FIS calendar level. Actual race functions are the responsibility of
the organizing committee.
All events shall have the most qualied ocials available. For scored events, at least one
member of the Race Jury should be certied as Level 3 or above.
Please consult the FIS ICR for the specic description of the relationships among the FIS
(for FIS competitions), the national federation, and the local organizing committee.
Organizing Committee
The actual running of the race is the function covered by the organizing committee, who’s
chief or chair is a part of the organizing committee. Note that the organizing committee is
very dierent from the race jury.
Start and nish referees are appointed by the organizing committee and are non-voting
jury advisors. The organizing committee appoints other chief ocials, assistants and crews.
The organizing committee, subject to the approval of the team captains and race jury, if not
previously assigned by FIS or U.S. Ski & Snowboard, may nominate course setters.
The technical delegate, chief of race, chief of course, course setters, referee, and assistant
referee must be members of U.S. Ski & Snowboard.
• Chief of Race (also a Jury Member) • Chief of Course
• Chief of Timing and Calculations • Chief Gate Judge
• Race Administrator • Start Referee*
• Finish Referee* * Non-voting Jury advisors
Other members as designated by the club or sponsoring organization
Race Jury
The jury is responsible for all decisions pertaining to the race, for the arbitration of protests,
and for upholding the rules. The jury and technical delegate must collaborate closely with the
organizing committee through the chief of race. Other members of the organizing committee,
such as the chief of course, chief gate judge or the chief of timing, may be called upon to
present information to the race jury, but they are not Jury members. For non-FIS events, jury
members must be members of U.S. Ski & Snowboard. For FIS events, jury members must be
members of U.S. Ski & Snowboard or another national skiing federation that is a member of
the FIS.
• Technical Delegate (Chair of the Race Jury) • Referee
• Chief of Race (also on organizing committee) • Assistant Referee (speed events only*)
* Assistant Referee can be appointed as a non-voting Jury member at technical events for training. An Assistant
Referee may also be appointed for a Parallel event if assistance is required for control of the event.
Ocials’ Manual
The Alpine Ocials Education Working Group has assembled a comprehensive manual
for alpine ocials (AO’s). The manual is available on the U.S. Ski & Snowboard website.
This manual is a guide to race organization, the rules, and duties of ocials, timing and
calculations, and other subject areas important to Alpine Ocials throughout the country.
It is intended to be as thorough as possible with updates and revisions produced as
necessary. However, it is not meant to be a step-by-step ‘cookbook’ with denitive procedures
for every race situation.
Gate Judge Video
A new gate judge video was produced in 2017 in cooperation with the AO Education
Working Group. The video can be viewed and downloaded at usskiandsnowboard.org.
70
Alpine Ocials Certication
A comprehensive certication program has been developed by the AO Working Group and
is in place on a nationwide basis. The program recognizes ocials at six dierent levels and
in a variety of specialty areas.
The program is handled on a divisional basis according to nationally established guidelines.
Except for the TD where certication at Level 3 and 4 is based on divisional nomination
and National TD Working Group approval. FIS technical delegates are certied only by FIS
after national federation nomination and successful completion of the FIS examination and
training program.
New ocials, without certication credentials, but with an alpine ocials membership,
will appear on the roster with no designation.
An alpine ocial membership does not assume certication. Rosters of ocials are
available at usskiandsnowboard.org. Rosters are managed by Divisional Chairs and submitted
for update to the U.S. Ski & Snowboard database.
Certication Levels
The Alpine Ocials Education Working Group has reviewed and modied the criteria for
Alpine Ocials advancement; the criteria are competency based. The criteria can be found at
usskiandsnowboard.org.
NOTE: See Technical Delegate and FIS Technical Delegate sections
Alpine Ocials who are certied as Referee, Jury Advisor, Chief or Race, Chief of
Course, Timing and Calculations and Race Administration are required to attend a bi-seasonal
Continuing Education clinic prior to serving in the respective positions and retain current
certication levels. Technical Delegates are required to attend a seasonal Technical Delegates’
Continuing Education Workshop prior to serving as a Technical Delegate and retain current
certication level.
• If an ocial has missed a Continuing Education clinic for two seasons, he or she may be
reinstated to the previous level by attending a recognized Continuing Education clinic.
• If an ocial has missed a Continuing Education clinic for three or more seasons, he or she
may be reinstated by passing the appropriate examination, i.e., Level 1 or 2 must pass the
Level 1 exam, Level 3 or 4 must pass the Level 3 exam.
• An ocial may not violate the Continuing Education rule a second time and maintain
certication.
Alpine Ocials Specialty Areas
Ocials are recognized in eight specialty areas, reecting dierent responsibilities,
abilities, and experience:
• Technical Delegate TD
• Referee RF
• Chief of Race CR
• Chief of Course CC
• Chief of Timing and Calculations TC
• Race Administrator RA
• Jury Advisor JA (for Start and Finish Referees)
• Competition Ocial CO
Some divisions may not recognize all categories at all levels, according to their own needs
and circumstances. All ocials should attend an annual Continuing Education clinic; they
must attend a bi-seasonal Continuing Education clinic prior to serving in the applicable
position. Ocials should work at least four days per year at U.S. Ski & Snowboard sanctioned
events.
71
Ocials Clinic Program
A variety of clinics for alpine ocials are held annually in each geographic division of U.S.
Ski & Snowboard. Clinics range from those designed as a mandatory refresher for FIS-certied
technical delegates and other senior ocials to introductory sessions for those ocials with
little or no experience. Topics may include timing and calculation, rules, gate judging, course
preparation, paperwork and the race secretariat, press relations and data management. There
is an emphasis on fairness, competitor protection and respect for the rules in all courses.
Attendance at recognized clinics is required for certication and for maintaining certication.
Certication exams are oered at many clinics, according to divisional needs; exams are
‘open-book’ but must be taken at a clinic. Use of computers to “search” for exam answers is
not allowed. Retesting of a failed Alpine Ocials exam may only occur after a revision of the
applicable exam become available. Exams shall be revised annually.
Clinic schedules are published on regional and divisional websites which can be found
through usskiandsnowboard.org.
Technical Delegates
Technical Delegates (TDs) are the ‘senior’ ocials in ski racing. FIS and U.S. Ski &
Snowboard assign them to alpine ski competitions, and they act as representatives of the
sanctioning bodies of ski racing at these competitions. While the actual conduct of the
race remains the responsibility of the sponsoring race organization, the TDs are expected
to be valued and positive contributors to the event, drawing on both their knowledge and
experience. They consult race organizers on procedures and rule interpretation. The TD chairs
the competition jury and has primary authority in matters of competitor protection.
The AO Committee has rearmed its long-standing policy that, under normal
circumstances, TDs will only be assigned to races where there can be no question as to their
independence from the organizing committee and the host ski area. The expenses of the TD
are the responsibility of the organizing group, including room and board at the competition
and transportation to and from the race site.
The position of TD requires knowledge and experience in all phases of ski competition,
and competency in on-hill as well as o-hill functions. Skiing ability, good judgment and a
sound knowledge of courses are also necessary.
Certication of Technical Delegates
The U.S. Ski & Snowboard TD Working Group has certication procedures for TDs:
1. To be certied as a Level 1 TD, an ocial must be certied as a Level 2 Referee and Level 1
Timing and Calculations. In the alternative, an ocial must be certied as a Level 1 Timing
and Calculations, Level 1 Chief of Race and Level 2 Jury Advisor. In the alternative, an
ocial must be certied as a Level 1 Timing and Calculations, a level 2 Chief of Race and
Level 1 Jury Advisor. It is strongly recommended that an ocial is certied as Chief of
Race and/or Chief of Course. They must also pass the Level 1 TD Exam with a grade of
75% or better.
2. A minimum of two shadow assignments - one tech and one speed - as an ‘aspirant’ under the
supervision of a Level 3 or higher TD be completed prior to completion of one assignment
as a ‘candidate’ under the supervision of a Level 3 or higher TD. Assignments must be
completed at dierent venues and must be supervised by dierent TDs. The supervising
TD’s must submit written evaluations of the candidate’s knowledge and performance, and
the ‘aspirant/candidate’ must submit race result packets as required by the division AO
Committee. Favorable written evaluations and submittal of required packets are required
prior to certication as a Level 1 TD. This service does not count towards the ten-day
requirement for advancement to Level 2.
72
3. Clinic attendance: every division is urged to conduct annual clinics for TDs.
Unless an exception is granted, annual attendance at a TD Continuing Education Workshop
(or equivalent: e.g., FIS TD Update) is required in order to retain current TD certication
level.
a. If a TD has missed a Technical Delegates’ Continuing Education Workshop (or approved
equivalent) for two seasons, he or she may be reinstated to the previous certication
level by attending an approved Continuing Education Workshop.
b. If a TD has missed a Technical Delegates’ Continuing Education Workshop (or
approved equivalent) for three or more seasons, he or she may be reinstated by passing
the appropriate examination, e.g., Level 1 or 2 must pass the Level 1 exam, Level 3 or 4
must pass the Level 3 exam.
c. A TD may not violate the Continuing Education Workshop (or equivalent) attendance
requirement for a second time and maintain TD certication.
4. Advancement: at each level, the approval of the applicable Alpine Ocials Committee is
required, plus:
a. Level 1 to Level 2: 10 workdays as a TD and favorable written recommendations from
two higher level TDs.
b. Level 2 to Level 3: should work an additional ten days as a TD, RF, or CR (events
should be scored events). Pass Level 3 TD exam with a score of 80% or higher, shadow
a Level 3 or 4 or FIS TD at a speed event and receive favorable recommendation from
the supervising TD, plus receive two additional written recommendations/evaluations
from Level 4 TD’s or Divisional AO Committee. Also requires approval by the National
TD Working Group, Rules & Tech Sub-Committee, and Alpine Sport Committee.
c. Level 3 to Level 4: a minimum of ve years of outstanding service as a Level 3 TD. Also
requires approval by the National TD Working Group, Rules & Tech Sub-Committee,
and Alpine Sport Committee.
5. A TD should work as an assigned TD a minimum of two days every season and must work
as an assigned TD at least once every two years to retain certication.
FIS Technical Delegate
FIS certied Technical Delegates are named by the FIS after the USA FIS-TD Working
Group has nominated those qualied individuals. Those individuals must successfully
complete the FIS entrance examination and the apprentice phase of on-hill assignments before
they are nominated. All current FIS TDs and candidates are expected to attend the annual
Continuing Education clinic. This mandatory clinic is a requirement for maintaining the TD
certication. Likewise, every FIS TD is expected to perform at least one FIS assignment
annually in addition to assisting the U.S. Ski & Snowboard ocials program.
FIS TDs are responsible for the proper overall conduct of the competition, working with
the Organizing Committee and competition jury with emphasis on competitor security. They,
along with the competition jury, are responsible for ensuring fair racing conditions for all
competitors. TDs must inspire teamwork and cooperation between the organizers, team
leaders and other ocials. They must be managers who lead by example, eectively helping
others.
Nominees successfully passing the FIS entrance examination are considered as candidates.
Understudy assignments as candidate TDs must be performed at three FIS calendared events,
encompassing three dierent events including downhill and as assigned by the USA FIS TD
Commissioner.
General Criteria for Selection of FIS TD Candidates
1. Candidates should be a U.S. Ski & Snowboard Level 3 or 4 TD and should have performed
satisfactorily as a Level 3 or 4 TD for approximately ve years. If the candidate is a coach
73
or an ex-coach, referee Level 3 credentials with at least Level 200 coaching credentials for
a similar period is required.
2. The candidate shall have maintained active membership in U.S. Ski & Snowboard for this
same ve-year period (extenuating circumstances may apply) and shall be a member in
good standing at the time of nomination.
3. Language uency in German or French is highly desirable and, while not a requirement,
could be a ‘tie-breaker’ if there are otherwise equal candidates.
4. Candidates should not have any physical limitations which would preclude active work on
the hill during adverse conditions.
5. Candidates should ideally possess strong leadership and diplomatic skills. A candidate
must have consistently demonstrated sound judgment and dependability.
6. While candidate selection is not age-discriminatory, relative youth in candidates is sought
after.
7. An individual who meets the above criteria may be nominated for FIS TD candidacy either
through the FIS TD Working Group (WG) or the TD WG.
a. The FIS TD WG requires that candidates demonstrate active participation in clinics
and out-of-division competitions. Individuals who have these credentials and who are
recommended as candidates must have a nomination and two seconds on the prescribed
nomination forms from current FIS TD’s (members of the USA FIS TD WG are
excluded). At least one of these must be from outside of the prospective candidate’s
division. One second from a Canadian or European TD is acceptable. Complete
documentation of nominations and seconds must be in the national oce by Apr. 1 of
the appropriate year. Nominations will not be accepted after Apr. 1.
b. To be nominated through the TD WG, the individual must be nominated by his/her
divisional or regional AO chair or committee. The nomination must be accompanied
by a resume which should include (but is not necessarily limited to) current ocial’s
credentials, documentation of ociating experience with emphasis on the past three
years, additional skiing, racing, coaching, and leadership experience. The nomination of
the individual must be seconded by two current Level 4 or 6 TD’s (members of the USA
FIS TD WG are excluded). The current FIS TD nomination forms must be used by the
nominator and seconders. Forms are available from the U.S. alpine oce. Documents
will be sent by the division to the Alpine Ocial’s Coordinator no later than April 1.
When these documents have been received, the forms will be circulated to the TD WG
members for comment and/or conrmation. If the TD WG favors the nomination of an
individual as a candidate, the individual’s name and supporting documentation will be
forwarded to the USA FIS TD WG for its consideration.
8. The nominating papers, whether originating from the TD WG or the USA FIS TD WG,
request specic information on the prospective candidate’s background and performance.
This includes current ocial’s credentials, documentation of ociating experience
as a national TD (or referee if a coach) and in other positions; documentation of clinic
participation as attendee or trainer; evaluation of candidate’s knowledge and demonstrated
application of FIS rules for all events; and evaluation of the candidate’s skiing ability.
Personal factors evaluated included dependability, ability to get along with people,
enthusiasm for ociating ski racing and judgment under pressure.
9. When the nominating documents have been received by the chair of the USA FIS TD WG
or the TD WG and the national oce the forms will be circulated to the WG members
for comment and/or conrmation. If the USA FIS TD WG approves the selection of an
individual as a candidate, the individual will be notied and will be required to attend one
of the two FIS Continuing Education clinics oered in October/November and take the FIS
entrance examination before he/she is accepted as a candidate.
74
10. For ocials accepted as FIS TD candidates, an understudy assignment phase will begin
with the current season. It generally takes two seasons to complete the candidacy process.
Please contact the USA FIS TD WG for more information on the understudy assignment
phase.
SPORT EDUCATION
Coach Development
Program Overview
The U.S. Ski & Snowboard Sport Education Department is committed to providing
coaches with exceptional, high-quality, engaging, and collaborative opportunities to learn and
develop their coaching skillset. Combining an acute knowledge of sport with best practices
of leadership is essential for developing not only a high level of physical performance,
but also the mental, emotional, and social well-being of athletes. Our levelized system
delivers relevant, engaging, impactful, and accessible courses developed through a holistic
instructional design process of aligning research-based coaching competencies with engaging
course content and multifaceted and engaging learning assessments.
Courses and educational material are developed to align with the Alpine Training
System (ATS) which provides a long-term athlete development plan to develop athletes
throughout their entire athletic lifespan. As the ATS outlines the long-term athlete
development progression for athletes, it also serves as the centralized curriculum for our
Long-Term Coach Development Pathway. Coaches need to understand athletic development
in order to coach them to high levels of success. The ATS was developed by club
leaders, national team coaches, and U.S. Ski & Snowboard sports science sta. Coaches,
parents, and athletes are encouraged to learn more about the Training System by visiting
usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-programs/training-systems.
Information for New Coach Members
All new member coaches must complete a background check, a SafeSport course, a
Coaching Fundamentals course, and an Introduction to Avalanches course before their
membership will become active. These opportunities are delivered through the membership
portal and are easily accessed by coach members. New coaches must also complete First Aid/
CPR certication, and Heads Up concussion training to round out the prerequisites of their
initial training requirements.
The Coach Development Pathway
The Coach Development Pathway consists of a progressive approach to developing the
knowledge, skills, and behaviors that coaches need to train athletes at specic stages of
long term athlete development. Level 100 delivers developmental concepts and strategies
appropriate for building a solid base of skiing fundamentals, Level 200 delivers strategies
and concepts that are appropriate for coaching athletes at the competitive level, and Level
300 provides strategies and concepts appropriate for coaching older high performing athletes.
As you can see in the diagram below, the certication courses are constructed from both best
practices in coaching principles as well as sport specic content that targets the categories of
Equipment, Technique, Tactics, and Competition.
75
The Alpine Level 100 Certication Course focuses on the foundations of quality coaching
and the fundamentals of ski racing. This course covers a wide range of topics, including
teaching methodologies, technical skiing, safety practices, and eective communication
strategies that coaches can use with athletes. Participants learn how to analyze and evaluate
skiing abilities, tailor lessons to individual needs, and create a positive and engaging learning
environment. By the end of the course, attendees will have gained a solid understanding of
the fundamentals of alpine skiing, setting them on the path to becoming skilled and condent
educators on the mountain.
After the Spring of 2024, all coaches will be required to be certied with a Level 100
certication or higher to coach at any sanctioned U.S. Ski & Snowboard event. Please
plan ahead and sign up now for a Level 100 course. Starting in the 2024-25 season, coach
membership will be “pending” until Level 100 requirements are met.
The Alpine Level 200 Certication Course is an advanced training program designed for
experienced coaches seeking to further enhance their coaching abilities. This course builds
upon the information presented within the Alpine Level 100 Coach Certication Course
and primarily focuses on coaches working with athletes within phases 3 and 4 of the Alpine
Training System. The course introduces coaches to the rst part of the book, Coaching
Better Every Season, by Dr. Wade Gilbert. The content of this coaching resource introduces
coaching practices that coaches should consider during the preseason and in-season sessions
of the annual coaching cycle.
In addition to completing the eLearning portion of the course, participants engage in an
intensive three-day on-snow assessment to evaluate personal skiing skills as well as hone their
ability to set a variety of eective course environments that create fast skiers in both Tech and
Speed events. The Level 200 Course places a strong emphasis on safety and risk management,
ensuring that coaches are well-prepared to handle diverse terrain and challenging conditions.
Successful completion of this course equips coaches with the expertise and condence to
elevate their coaching and create exceptional learning experiences for their athletes.
Coaches who have limited or no experience setting courses must take Introduction to
Course Setting before enrolling in the Alpine Level 200 Certication Course.
The Alpine Level 300 Certication Course is currently the most advanced training course
within the alpine coach development system and is designed for coaches working with older
high performing athletes, primarily focusing on phases 5 & 6 of the Alpine Training System.
This course reinforces the key concepts of the Level 100 and 200 courses and focuses on
rening technical skills, advanced teaching methodologies, and tactical analysis in alpine ski
racing.
76
In addition to introducing these concepts in the eLearning portion of the course, participants
are also introduced to the second half of the book, Coaching Better Every Season by Dr. Wade
Gilbert. The topics covered include coaching practices that should be considered within the
end-of-season and o-season sessions of the annual coaching cycle.
After completing the eLearning requirements, participants engage in an intensive seven-
day on-snow assessment, led by experienced coach developers. The focus of this experience
develops advanced techniques and racing tactics within both the Tech and Speed environments.
The Level 300 Course also delves into video analysis and personalized feedback to ne-
tune coaching responsibilities at this level. Graduates of this course are equipped with a
comprehensive understanding of advanced skiing techniques and racing tactics, enabling
them to excel as elite coaches in the world of alpine skiing.
Through the coach development pathway of Level 100, Level 200, and Level 300, coaches
can either work through the full certication process, or stay at a specic level if that is
where their comfort level resides. Minimum levels of certication may be required however
for various resorts, as well as both divisional, regional, or national coaching projects, course
setting, and other responsibilities.
Coach Recognition
Upon completing certication courses within the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Coach
Development Pathway, coaches receive well-deserved recognition and acknowledgment
for their dedication and expertise in the elds of skiing and snowboarding. The certication
process serves as a comprehensive and rigorous evaluation of their coaching abilities,
technical knowledge, and instructional skills. Accreditation signies a coach’s commitment
to professional growth and development, and it also demonstrates their ability to eectively
mentor and guide athletes. As a result, certied coaches gain credibility and respect within
the skiing and snowboarding community, opening doors to new opportunities and enhancing
their coaching careers. Their accomplishments are celebrated, and they become part of a
supportive network of like-minded professionals, contributing to the overall advancement of
winter sports coaching in the United States.
The Course Structure
Certication courses within the coach development pathway provide a blended learning
experience for participants that has proven to be an innovative and eective approach to
education, oering a plethora of positive eects on students’ learning experiences. By
combining traditional face-to-face instruction with online learning, this approach caters to
diverse learning styles and individual paces, creating a more personalized and engaging
environment for students. With access to a wealth of digital resources, students can reinforce
their understanding of concepts, explore additional materials, and conduct independent
research, fostering a deeper comprehension of the subject matter. Furthermore, the exibility
of blended learning empowers students to take ownership of their learning, promoting self-
discipline, time management, and critical thinking skills. Collaborative online activities like
our Pre and Post Meetings and portfolio development process encourage interaction among
students and coach developers, building positive relationships and enhancing teamwork
abilities.
Conferences/Symposiums/Continuing Education
U.S. Ski & Snowboard also hosts or participates in several national and regional coaching
conferences and symposiums and oers live and recorded opportunities for coaches to attend
these sessions. Coach members are encouraged to pursue continuous professional development
opportunities which are available both internally and provided through outside organizations
like PSIA and AASI. Certied coaches must keep their membership active by completing a
series of continuing education credits. A list of continuing education opportunities can be
found at usskiandsnowboard.org/sites/default/les/les-resources/les/2022/Continuing%20
Education%20Framework%20-Ed%20Committee%20Review.docx%20%281%29.pdf.
77
A wealth of coaching information is available on the U.S. Ski & Snowboard website at
usskiandsnowboard.org/sport-development/coaches-development.
Member coaches also have access to a comprehensive Video Library collection
videos.usskiandsnowboard.org/SportEdVideoLibrary.
You can nd the Training System, SkillsQuest Competition Guide as well as an ever-
growing array of tools for you to use by searching the U.S. Ski & Snowboard website.
Coaches can follow Sport Education on Facebook to receive updates on Education events and
to network and share ideas at facebook.com/ussasporteducation. You must have a facebook
account to access this website.
Member Coaches are also encouraged to participate in the Coaching Community Forum
that is located within the Learning Center at education.usskiandsnowboard.org. You must
have a valid coaching membership to access this website.
78
Club Development
The U.S. Ski & Snowboard Club Development Program assists member clubs striving to
improve the athletic experience for all constituents by supporting clubs in their increasingly
complex environments through education, certication, recognition, and resources. Well
organized and managed clubs are key to a successful experience for athletes and their families,
coaches and other stakeholders.
The cornerstone of the Club Development Program is the Podium Certication Program.
This certication process is mission-driven and self-reective and allows a club to benchmark
their performance against established standards; creating a platform for setting goals and
measuring success. It provides a club with a roadmap for ongoing evaluation and continuous
improvement.
Clubs that are not yet ready to engage in the certication application process, or are not
sure if they have the capacity to start, can still benet greatly from reviewing and discussing
the materials and exercises related to the process. It will give them tools to understand best
principles and practices and how they can improve as a club, as well as give them a realistic
idea if they have the structure and resources in place to initiate the certication process.
Podium Level Club Certication
This certication pathway is designed for clubs that want to perform a comprehensive
organizational assessment in order to verify and demonstrate their understanding of the best
principles and implementation of best practices. The process is a partnership between U.S. Ski
& Snowboard and the individual club, supported by education and resources, and culminates
with a club interview (bronze level candidates) or club visit (silver/gold level candidates).
U.S. Ski & Snowboard Podium Certied Clubs are expected to engage in a continuous
process of self-assessment, reection and on-going improvement that enables them to stay
relevant to their missions and to the athletes and families they serve. Clubs demonstrate this
commitment by working continuously to improve their programs, actively participating in
professional development opportunities and pursuing and maintaining certication.
Bronze-certied club: Podium level of certication for established or new clubs that have
all the required elements in place for organizational and athletic success. The certication
process involves a comprehensive organizational assessment putting the club on the path to
continual improvement. The Bronze certication process is open to all clubs.
Silver-certied club: Podium level of certication for well-established and highly
functioning clubs both organizationally and athletically. These clubs serve as a model in
these areas, have consistent and long-standing track records of organizational and/or athletic
success. Silver-level certication requires the approval of the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Club
Development Manager before starting the process.
Gold-certied club: This level of certication is reserved for the highest performing clubs
in the country - organizationally and athletically. The standards for Gold are based on the
ability to provide year ‘round holistic support to athletes, including the availability of sports
psychology, nutrition, strength and condition and rehab/recovery programs.
Contact
Contact 435.647.2050 | [email protected] for additional information
about U.S. Ski & Snowboard coaches education and club development programs.
79
Bradford, VT • Salt Lake City, UT
Your continued support and patronage allows
us to support education, safety and innovation
in the sport we all love. Thank you for being our
customers, partners and friends.
Thank you!
80
Thank You
to our Corporate Partners for supporting
the athletes of U.S. Ski & Snowboard
81
CHAPTER 7
ALPINE COMPETITION
REGULATIONS
82
The following rules and regulations for U.S. Ski & Snowboard alpine competition (ACR)
capture the specic rules for competition events that are scheduled and sanctioned by U.S. Ski
& Snowboard as the national governing body for ski sport as identied by the United States
Olympic Committee. The FIS International Competition Regulations (ICR) and adjuncts
shall govern all issues not addressed herein.
For all events scheduled by U.S. Ski & Snowboard as FIS events, the rules of the FIS
apply. Rules for FIS events are available through the Membership Department or from FIS at
s-ski.com. The FIS rule books are referred to as the ICR.
In cases where regulations that are not addressed by the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Competition
Regulations for national events or by the FIS International Competition Regulations for FIS
events, or in cases where the rules must be interpreted, the authority for making decisions will
be the responsibility of the Technical Delegate and competition Jury.
The U.S. Ski & Snowboard ACR has been organized so that the numbers match those in the
FIS ICR. A similar rule will have the same number regardless of which book. As an example,
the rules for making a protest are now in section 640 of both books. There may be some
dierence in language between the two books, but the intent of the rule is the same. When a
FIS rule does not apply to national competitions, it was left out, so the number of the rules
might go 650.1 followed by 650.3. Where there is no corresponding FIS rule, a ‘U’ is placed
at the beginning of the rule number to identify this as unique to U.S. Ski & Snowboard.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1 Joint Regulations for all Competitions 84
200 Joint Regulations for all Competitions
201 Types of Competitions
202 Ski Calendar
203 Membership
204 Qualication of Competitors
205 Competitor Obligations and Rights
210 Organization of Competition
211 The Organization
212 Insurance
213 Program
214 Announcements
215 Entries
216 Team Captains Meeting
217 Draw
218 Publication of Results
221 Doping
222 Competition Equipment
223 Sanctions
224 Procedural Guidelines
225 U.S. Ski & Snowboard Alpine Judicial Committee
226 Violation of Sanctions
Section 2 Rules Common to Alpine Events 91
600 Organization
601 Organizing Committee and Jury
601.4 The Jury
602 The Technical Delegate (TD)
603 Course Setter
83
604.2 Rights and Duties of the Team Captains and Trainers
605 Forerunners
606 Competitor Equipment
607 Age Limits
610 Start, Finish, Timing and Calculations
611 Technical Installations
612 Start and Finish Ocials
613 The Start
614 Course and Competition
615 The Finish
617 Calculation and Announcement of Results
619 Award Ceremony
620 Start Order
621 Group Draw and Start Order
622 Start Intervals
623 Re-runs
624 Interruption of the Run or Training
625 Termination of a Competition
626 Report
627 Not Permitted to Start (NPS)
628 Penalties
629 Disqualications
640 Protests
641 Types of Protests
642 Place of Submittal
643 Deadlines for Submittal
644 Form of Protests
645 Authorization
646 Settlement of Protests by the Jury
647 Right of Appeal
650 Rules about the Homologation of the Courses
660 Gate Judge Instructions
661 Control of Passage
662 Importance of the Task of the Gate Judge
663 Giving Information to a Competitor
664 Immediate Announcement of Disqualifying Faults
665 Duties of the Gate Judge on Completion of the 1st and 2nd run
666 Duties of the Gate Judge at the Conclusion of the Race
667 Supplemental Duties of the Gate Judge
668 Location and Support of the Gate Judge
669 Number of Gate Judges
670 Video control
680 Poles
690 Gate Panels for Giant Slalom, Super-G and Downhill
Section 3 Particular Rules for the Dierent Events 124
700 Downhill (DH) 124
800 Slalom (SL) 128
900 Giant Slalom (GS) 133
1000 Super G (SG) 134
1100 Combined (AC and K) 136
84
Section 4 Special Rules 137
1200 Competitions under Articial Light 137
1220 Team Competitions 137
U1226 Parallel 137
U1250 Youth Competitions 142
U1251 General Regulations
U1252 Regulations for Organization
U1253 U14 and older Downhill
U1254 U16 and younger Slalom
U1255 U16 and younger Giant Slalom
U1256 U12 and older Super G
U1257 Starting Order
U1258 Starting Order for the 2nd Run
1260 National Race Points 144
1270 National Points 144
Additional Regulations 145
Course Setting Specications 148
Competition Equipment Rules 149
Para Competition Rules 152
Course Approvals 153
Concussion Checklist 156
Section 1: Joint Regulations for all Competitions
200 Joint Regulations for all Competitions
200.1 All events must be held under the applicable rules found in this guide.
200.3 Participation
Competitions listed in the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Calendar are only open to
competitors who hold a valid U.S. Ski & Snowboard alpine participant membership.
200.5 Control
All competitions listed in the Calendar must be supervised by a U.S. Ski &
Snowboard alpine Technical Delegate (TD).
201 Types of Competitions
201.1 Competitions with limited participation may be held under special competition
rules as approved by U.S. Ski & Snowboard. Any such rules must be published in
the announcement.
U201.1.1 U.S. Ski & Snowboard may sanction organizers who, through their own fault,
prepare competitions so poorly that they must be canceled by the Jury or the TD.
U201.1.2 Organizers who hold competitions involving competitors not qualied under
articles 203 through 204.1.7 have violated the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Competition
Rules and measures are to be taken against them by U.S. Ski & Snowboard.
201.6 Types of Competitions
Alpine ski competitions consist of:
201.6.2 Downhill (DH), Slalom (SL), Giant Slalom (GS), Super G (SG), Alpine Combined
(AC), Parallel (P), Kombi (K), SkillsQuest (SQ) and Team Competitions.
85
202 Ski Calendar
202.1.2.3 Homologations
All alpine competitions that appear in the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Calendar may
only take place on competition courses homologated or registered by U.S. Ski &
Snowboard or FIS for those events.
The homologation certicate number must be indicated when applying for the
inclusion of an alpine competition in the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Calendar.
202.1.2.4 The Ski Calendar is published at usskiandsnowboard.org.
U202.2 A maximum of two scored DH or SG races, or one scored SL or GS race, per
gender, may be calendared per day by an organizer.
U202.2.1 In cases of ‘force majeure’, where more than two DH or SG races, or more than
one SL or GS race, per gender, is conducted in one day and in one place, then the
ocial Program showing inspection times, start times, course reset/redress times
and start intervals for both races must be included with the race results packet
submitted to U.S. Ski & Snowboard.
U202.2.2 By signature on the Technical Delegate Report, the Technical Delegate conrms
that the rules were followed in the execution of this procedure.
202.5 Calendar Fees
202.5.1 There is a sanction fee for each event in the Ski Calendar.
202.5.2 The fees are published by U.S. Ski & Snowboard.
203 Membership
U203.1 The membership year begins on July 1 and nishes on June 30 of the following
year. Memberships shall be valid in the USA for the membership year only. The
validity of a membership can be limited to participation in one or more specic
events.
U203.2 To be eligible to participate in alpine competitions, a competitor must have a
Competitor, Non-Scored Student, Short-Term Alpine, or Masters membership.
All participants in positions of authority over athletes (Jury members, Start and
Finish Referees, Chief of Course, Chief of Competition, Chief of Timing, Race
Administrator, Course Setters, Technicians, Judges, and Coaches) must have a valid
membership (including background check, SafeSport education, and avalanche
education) and appropriate ocials’ certication for their position as required.
For USA sanctioned FIS events, when a foreign FIS Federation lists a coach on
their entry form, that Federation is certifying that the coach has the knowledge and
ability to fulll the duties of a Team Captain: e.g., serve as a Jury member or set a
course.
A U.S. Ski & Snowboard membership will only be issued to individuals who have
personally signed the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Release, in the actual form approved
by U.S. Ski & Snowboard. All forms from under-age applicants must be counter-
signed by their legal guardians.
All Coaches, Ocials, and Contractors who apply for a membership will be
required to pass a background screening process and complete SafeSport training
prior to that membership being approved. Any Coach, Ocial, or Contractor who
is shown as “pending” or not current on the U.S. Ski & Snowboard website may
not serve in any capacity which places them in a position of authority over athletes.
General members are eligible to forerun but not to compete in sanctioned events.
Members may only act in the capacity which their membership permits, e.g., to
serve as a coach within a competition arena, a member must possess a valid coach
membership.
86
Only individuals authorized by the Race Jury may enter a competition arena.
204 Qualication of Competitors
204.1 U.S. Ski & Snowboard shall not support or recognize within its structure, nor shall
it issue a membership to any competitor who:
204.1.1 has conducted themselves in an improper or unsportsmanlike manner or has
not respected or conformed to all aspects of the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Code of
Conduct,
204.1.2 accepts or has accepted, directly or indirectly, any money payments in a way that
does not conform to the rules for participation in a competition,
204.1.3 accepts or has accepted a prize of a higher value than allowed by U.S. Ski &
Snowboard,
204.1.6 has not signed the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Waiver,
204.1.7 is under suspension.
205 Competitor Obligations and Rights
205.1 The competitors are obliged to make themselves familiar with the appropriate rules
and must comply with the additional instructions of the Organizing Committee and
the Jury.
205.2 Competitors are not permitted to compete while under the inuence of drugs or
alcohol.
205.3 Competitors must follow the rules and regulations, and instructions of the Jury.
205.4 Competitors who do not attend the prize-giving ceremonies without excuse lose
their claim to any prize.
205.5 Competitors must behave in a correct and sportsmanlike manner toward members
of the Organizing Committee, ocials and the public.
205.8 Competitors are prohibited from betting on the outcome of competitions in which
they are participating.
210 Organization of Competition
211 The Organization
211.1 The Organizer
211.1.1 The organizer is the person or group who makes the necessary preparations and
directly carries out the running of the competition.
211.1.3 The Organizer must ensure that accredited persons accept the regulations regarding
the competition rules and Jury decisions, and is obliged to obtain the signature of
all persons who do not have a valid accreditation on an “Volunteer Competition
Working Registration” form to this eect.
211.2 The Organizing Committee
The Organizing Committee consists of those members (physical or legal) who are
delegated by the organizer and by U.S. Ski & Snowboard. It carries the rights,
duties and obligations of the organizer.
212 Insurance
Information on event insurance can be found in chapter 1 of this guide.
213 Program
A program must be published by the organizers for each competition listed in the
Ski Calendar, which must contain:
213.1 name, date and place of the competitions, together with information on the
competition sites and the best ways of reaching them,
213.2 technical data on the individual competitions and conditions for participation,
213.3 names of principal ocials,
87
213.4 time and place for the rst team captains meeting, seeding method and draw,
213.5 timetable for the beginning of ocial training and the start times,
213.6 location of the ocial notice board or method used for ocial postings,
213.7 time and place for the prize giving,
213.8 nal date of entry and address for entries, including telephone and fax numbers and
email address,
U213.9 entry fees and left fees.
214 Announcements
214.1 The Organizing Committee must publish an announcement for the event. It must
contain the information required by art. 213.
214.2 Organizers are bound by the rules and decisions of U.S. Ski & Snowboard in
limiting the number of entries. Reduction in entries is possible provided it is made
clear in the announcement.
214.3 Postponements or cancellations of competitions and program alterations must
be communicated immediately by telephone, email or fax to the Competition
Services, all invited clubs/divisions and the appointed TD. Competitions moved to
an earlier date must be approved by the national oce.
215 Entries
215.1 All entries must be sent so that the Organizing Committee receives them before the
nal date of entry. The organizers must have a nal and complete list not later than
24 hours before the rst draw.
215.2 Competitors are not permitted to enter in more than one competition calendared by
more than one race organizing committee on the same date.
215.3 Every entry should include:
215.3.1 National ID number, last name, rst name, year-of-birth, club,
215.3.2 an exact denition of the event for which the entry is made,
U215.3.3 the entry fee.
216 Team Captains Meetings
216.1 The time and location of the rst team captains meeting and of the draw must be
shown in the program. The invitations for all other meetings have to be announced
to the team captains at their rst meeting. Emergency meetings must be announced
in good time.
216.2 Representation by a substitute during discussions at team captains’ meetings is not
allowed.
216.3 The team captains and trainers must be accredited by the organizers according to
quota.
216.4 Team captains and trainers must obey the ACR and the decisions of the Jury and
must behave in a proper and sportsmanlike manner.
217 Draw
217.1 Competitor starting order for each event is decided according to a specic formula
by draw and/or point order.
217.3 If competitors are not represented at the team captains meeting by a team captain
or trainer, they will only be drawn if it is conrmed by telephone or fax by the
beginning of the meeting that they will participate.
217.4 Competitors who were drawn but were not present during the competition, must be
named by the TD in his report, indicating if possible, the reasons for absence.
217.5 Representatives of all competitors taking part must be invited to the draw.
Except for events for which an alternate method has been approved, if a competition
88
has to be postponed by at least one day, the draw must be done again.
218 Publication of Results
218.1 The unocial and ocial results will be published in accordance with the rules for
the specic event.
221 Doping
Doping is forbidden.
222 Competition Equipment
222.1 A competitor may only take part in a competition with equipment that conforms to
U.S. Ski & Snowboard regulations. Competitors are responsible for the equipment
they use (skis, bindings, ski boots, suit, etc.). It is their duty to check that the
equipment conforms to the rules and general safety requirements and is in working
order. More information regarding the specic regulations can be found in the
supplemental rules later in this book.
222.2 The term competition equipment encompasses all items of equipment which the
competitor uses in competition. This includes clothing as well as apparatus with
technical functions. The entire competition equipment forms a functional unit.
222.3 All new developments in the eld of competition equipment must be approved
in principle by U.S. Ski & Snowboard. U.S. Ski & Snowboard does not take any
responsibility for the approval of new technical developments, which at the time
of introduction may contain unknown dangers to the health or cause an increase in
the risk of accidents.
223 Sanctions
223.1 General Conditions
223.1.1 An oense for which a sanction may apply and a penalty be imposed is dened as
conduct that:
• is in violation or non-observance of competition rules, or
• constitutes non-compliance with directives of the Jury or individual members of
the Jury in accordance with 224.2, or
• is unsportsmanlike.
223.1.2 The following conduct shall also be considered an oense:
• attempting to commit an oense
• causing or facilitating others to commit an oense
• counseling others to commit an oense.
223.1.3 In determining whether conduct constitutes an oense consideration should be
given to:
• whether the conduct was intentional or unintentional,
• whether the conduct arose from circumstances of an emergency.
223.1.4 All aliated associations, including their members registered for accreditation,
shall accept and acknowledge these rules and all sanctions imposed, subject only
to the right of appeal pursuant to the rules.
223.2 Applicability
223.2.1 Persons
These sanctions apply to:
• all persons who are accredited either by U.S. Ski & Snowboard or the Organizer
for an event published in the calendar, both within and without the connes of the
competition area and any location connected with the competition, and
• all persons who are not accredited, within the connes of the competition area.
223.3 Penalties
89
223.3.1 The commission of an oense may subject a person to the following penalties:
• reprimand - written or verbal
• withdrawal of accreditation
• denial of accreditation
223.3.2 All competing competitors may be subject to the following additional penalties:
• disqualication
• impairment of their starting position (no limit)
• forfeiture of prizes and benets in favor of the organizer
• suspension from events
• the accumulation of penalties is permissible
223.3.3 A competitor shall only be disqualied if his mistake would result in an advantage
for him with regard to the end result, unless the rules state otherwise in an individual
case.
223.4 A Jury may impose the penalties provided in 223.3.1 and 223.3.2, however they
may not impose a monetary ne or suspend a competitor beyond the event at which
the oense occurred.
223.5 The following Penalty decisions may be given verbally:
• reprimands
• the withdrawal of accreditation for the current event from persons who had not
been registered with the organizer through their aliated organization.
• the withdrawal of the accreditation for the current event from accredited persons
• the denial of accreditation to the current event from persons who are within
the connes of the competition area or any other location connected with the
competition.
223.6 The following Penalty decisions shall be in writing:
• disqualications
• impaired starting position
• competition suspensions
• withdrawal of accreditation from persons who had been registered through their
aliated organization
• withdrawal of accreditation of accredited persons,
223.7 Written Penalty decisions must be sent to the oender (if they are not a competitor),
the oender’s club and Competition Services.
223.8 Any disqualications shall be recorded in the Referee’s and/or the TD’s Report.
223.9 All penalties shall be recorded in the TD Report.
224 Procedural Guidelines
224.1 Competence of Jury
The Jury at the event has the right to impose sanctions according to the above rules
by majority vote. In the case of a tie, the chairman of the Jury has the deciding vote.
224.2 Within the location, especially during training and the competition period, each
voting Jury member is authorized to issue oral reprimands and withdraw the
accreditation which is issued for the current event.
224.3 Collective Oenses
If several persons commit the same oense at the same time and under the same
circumstances, the Jury’s decision as to one oender may be considered binding
upon all oenders. The written decision shall include the names of all oenders
concerned and the scope of the penalty to be assessed upon each of them. The
decision will be delivered to each oender.
90
224.4 Limitation
A person shall not be sanctioned if proceedings to invoke such sanction have not
been commenced against that person within 72 hours following the oense.
224.5 Each person who is a witness to an alleged oense is required to testify at any
hearing called by the Jury, and the Jury is required to consider all relevant evidence.
224.6 The Jury may conscate objects that are suspected of being used in the violation of
equipment guidelines.
224.7 Prior to the imposition of a penalty (except in cases of reprimands and withdrawal
of accreditation according to 223.5 and 224.2), the person accused of an oense
shall be given the opportunity to present a defense at a hearing, orally or in writing.
224.8 All Jury decisions shall be recorded in writing and shall include:
224.8.1 The oense alleged to have been committed.
224.8.2 The evidence of the oense
224.8.3 The rule(s) or Jury directives that have been violated
224.8.4 The penalty imposed.
224.9 The penalty shall be appropriate to the oense. The scope of any penalty imposed
by the Jury must consider any mitigating and aggravating circumstances.
224.10 Remedies
224.10.1 Except as provided for in 224.11, a penalty decision of the Jury may be appealed in
accordance with the provisions in the ACR.
224.10.2 If an appeal is not led within the deadline established in the ACR, the penalty
decision of the Jury becomes nal.
224.11 The following decisions of the Jury are not subject to appeal:
224.11.1 Oral penalties imposed under 223.5 and 224.2.
U224.11.2 In case of suspensions exceeding one week, the Alpine Judicial Committee is the
only source of appeal.
224.12 In all remaining cases, appeals are to be directed to the appropriate appeals
committee in accordance with rule 647.
224.13 The Jury shall have the right to submit to the Alpine Judicial Committee
recommendations for suspensions beyond the event in which the oense occurred.
224.15 Costs of Proceedings
Fees and cash expenses, including travel expenses (costs of the proceedings) are to
be calculated comparable to costs paid to TDs and are to be paid by the oender. In
the case of a reversal of Jury decisions, in whole or in part, U.S. Ski & Snowboard
covers all costs.
225 U.S. Ski & Snowboard Alpine Judicial Committee
U.S. Ski & Snowboard has established procedures and committees for appeals
against Jury decisions, disciplinary actions (including Code of Conduct violations)
and start rights. See the Rules for Grievances, Suspensions and Appeals in Article
IX of the U.S. Ski & Snowboard Bylaws.
226 Violation of Sanctions
Where there is a violation of a sanction that has been imposed, the Alpine
Judicial Committee may impose such further and other sanctions that it considers
appropriate.
In such cases, some or all of the following sanctions may apply:
226.1 Sanctions against individuals involved:
• a written reprimand, and/or
• a competition or project suspension at the next level of sanction - for example,
91
if a three-month suspension for a doping oense was imposed, a violation of the
suspension will cause a two-year suspension; if a two-year suspension for a doping
oense was imposed, a violation of the suspension will cause a lifetime suspension,
and/or
• withdrawal of accreditation from individuals involved.
Section 2 Rules Common to Alpine Events
600 Organization
Reference is made to art. 211.
601 Organizing Committee and Jury
601.1 Composition
The Organizing Committee consists of those members (physical or legal) who are
delegated by the organizer and U.S. Ski & Snowboard. It carries the rights, duties
and obligations of the organizer.
601.2 Appointments by U.S. Ski & Snowboard
U.S. Ski & Snowboard appoints the Technical Delegate for all competitions
according to the following process. FIS Events will be appointed by the USA FIS
TD commissioner and assisted by Regional FIS TD Coordinators. Championship
events will be appointed by the regions as follows: Eastern – FIS TD coordinator
assisted by Eastern AO Committee; Central – Central AO Chairman; Rocky –
RMSRO AO Committee; Western – ACC/AO Committee. Regional Events will be
appointed by the regions as follows: Eastern – by Divisional AO/TD Committees;
Central – Region Chair with Central AO Chairman Approval; Rocky – RMSRO
AO Committee; Western – Divisional AO Chairs.
601.2.3 The Technical Delegate appoints
• the Referee and
• for DH, and SG the Assistant Referee
601.2.4 By these appointments the above persons become members of the Organizing
Committee (OC).
U601.2.5 An Assistant Referee may be assigned at technical events (SL/GS) for training
purposes only. At these events, the Assistant Referee will have neither voice nor
vote in Jury Meetings and their names will not appear on ocial documents. An
Assistant Referee may also be appointed at Parallel events if required for control
of both courses.
601.3 Appointments by the organizer
The organizer appoints all other members of the Organizing Committee. The chair
or their representative represents the committee in public, leads the meetings and
makes decisions concerning all matters that are not made by other persons or
groups. Before, during and after the competition(s) the chair works closely with
U.S. Ski & Snowboard and its appointed ocials. The chair takes on all other
duties that are necessary for carrying out the competition.
The following ocials must be appointed by the organizer:
U601.3.1 The Chief of Race
The Chief of Race directs all preparation of the competition and supervises
the activities in the technical area. The Chief of Race summons meetings for
consideration of technical questions and leads the team captains’ meetings after
consultation with the Technical Delegate. The Chief of Race must be certied
as Chief of Race, Referee, or Technical Delegate and must have attended a bi-
92
seasonal Continuing Education Clinic prior to the event.
U601.3.2 The Chief of Course (Section Chief)
The Chief of Course is responsible for the preparation of the courses in accordance
with the directives and decisions of the Jury. The Chief of Course must be familiar
with local snow conditions on the terrain concerned. The Chief of Course must be
a certied Chief of Course, Chief of Race, Referee or Technical Delegate and must
have attended a bi-seasonal Continuing Education Clinic prior to the event.
U601.3.3 The Start Referee
The Start Referee must remain at the start from the beginning of the ocial
inspection time until the end of a training/event,
• must be a member in good standing with as an ocial.
• must be certied as CR, JA, RF or TD, and must have attended a bi-seasonal
Continuing Education Clinic prior to the event.
• make sure that the regulations for the start and the start organization are properly
observed,
• determine late and false starts,
• must be able to communicate with the Jury at all times (705.5),
• reports the names of competitors who did not start to the Referee, and informs
the Jury of all infringements against the rules, such as false or delayed starts or
violations against the rules for equipment,
• ensure that reserve bibs are available at the start.
U601.3.4 The Finish Referee
The Finish Referee must remain at the nish from the beginning of the ocial
inspection time until the end of a training/event,
• must be a member in good standing as an ocial.
• must be certied as CR, JA, RF or TD, and must have attended a bi-seasonal
Continuing Education Clinic prior to the event.
• makes sure that all the regulations for the organization of the nish and the nish
in-run and out-run are properly observed.
• supervise the nish controller, the timing and the crowd control in the nish area,
• must be able to communicate immediately with the Jury at all times,
• reports the names of the competitors who did not nish to the Referee and informs
the Jury of all infringements against the rules.
601.3.5 The Chief Gate Judge
The Chief Gate Judge:
• organizes and supervises the work of the gate judges,
• designates the gates each will supervise and places them in position,
• at the end of the rst run and the end of the race collects the gate judge control
cards and delivers them to the Referee,
• distributes, in good time, to each gate judge, the material they need (control card,
pencil, start list, etc.),
• is prepared to oer assistance either to help keep spectators o the course or to
help maintain the course, etc.
• makes sure that the numbering and the marking of the gates is completed within
the required time.
U601.3.6 The Chief of Timing and Calculations
The chief of timing and calculations is responsible for the coordination of ocials
at the start and nish, including timing and calculations. In SL, the Chief of Timing
93
or a special assistant will decide the interval between starts. The following ocials
are under his direction:
• starter
• assistant starter
• start recorder
• chief timekeeper
• assistant timekeepers
• nish controller
• chief of calculations and his assistants
He oversees preparation of the Timing and Data Technical Report (TDTR) for the
result packet. (The TDTR Software can be found on the FIS website and used for
the preparation of the report.)
He must be appropriately certied in Timing and Calculations for all sanctioned
events and must have attended a bi-seasonal Continuing Education Clinic prior to
the event.
U601.3.7 The Race Secretary
The race secretary is responsible for all secretarial work for the technical aspects of
the competition and amongst others for the preparation of the draw. Additionally,
the Race Secretary:
• ensures that the ocial results contain the information required by art. 617.3.4,
• is responsible for the minutes of the technical ocials, the Jury and team captains’
meetings,
• ensures that all forms for start, nish, timing, calculations and gate-judging are
well prepared, and handed over to the ocials concerned in good order at the
proper time,
• facilitates the calculation of results by appropriate preparation and ensures that
they are duplicated and published as quickly as possible after the completion of the
competition.
He must be appropriately certied in Race Administration for all sanctioned events
and unless an exception is granted by the Divisional/Regional AO Chair, RAs are
required to attend an approved RA Workshop annually prior to the event. They
must attend a bi-seasonal Workshop in order to retain current certication.
U601.3.8 The Chief of Medical and Rescue Services
The Chief of Medical and Rescue Services is responsible for organizing adequate
rst aid and medical coverage during the ocial training periods and the actual
competition. The Chief of Medical must work closely with the Jury and particularly
the Technical Delegate, keeping them informed as to the nature and disposition of
any injury.
U601.3.9 The organizer is authorized to include other ocials within the Organizing
Committee (OC).
601.4 The Jury
The following members of the Jury, who are members of the Organizing Committee
are responsible for technical matters within the closed competition areas:
• the Technical Delegate
• the Referee
• the Chief of Race
• the Assistant Referee for DH and SG
601.4.2 Appointment of the Jury.
94
601.4.2.1 U.S. Ski & Snowboard appoints the Technical Delegate. (art. 601.2)
601.4.2.2 The TD appoints
• the Referee
• and for DH and SG, the Assistant Referee
• substitute Jury members in case of force majeure
U601.4.2.3 The Jury should, when possible, include a woman.
601.4.2.4 The Chief of Race must have current ocials’ membership, appropriate
certication, and must have attended a bi-seasonal Continuing Education Clinic
prior to the event.
601.4.3 Exclusions
601.4.3.1 A competitor cannot be a member of the Jury.
601.4.4 Tenure of the Jury
601.4.4.1 The appointed Jury members gather for their rst meeting prior to the rst team
captains meeting.
601.4.4.2 The active duty of the Jury begins with its rst meeting and ends, if no protest is
submitted, at the expiration of the protest deadline, otherwise after settlement of all
submitted protests.
601.4.5 Franchise and Voting
The TD is the chair of the Jury. He conducts the meetings. Each of the following
has one vote in the Jury:
601.4.5.2 The TD, Chief of Race, Referee and in the case of DH and SG, the Assistant
Referee.
601.4.5.3 Decisions are made by simple majority vote of members present and voting
(exception art. 646.3).
601.4.5.4 In the case of a tie, the TD has the casting vote.
601.4.5.5 Minutes must be kept of all meetings and decisions of the Jury and signed by each
individual member of the Jury, with each individual vote on decisions recorded, as
per art. 601.3.7.
601.4.5.7 In cases where an immediate decision must be made and it is not possible to
convene the entire Jury, each member of the Jury has the right, prior to or during
the race, to make decisions which according to the rules per se are reserved to the
Jury as a whole; but only provisionally with the obligation to have the decision
conrmed by the Jury as soon as possible.
601.4.6 Duties of the Jury
The Jury monitors the adherence to the rules throughout the entire race, including
the ocial training.
601.4.6.1 From a technical standpoint particularly by:
• checking the race-course and the set courses
• checking the snow conditions
• checking the preparation of the course
• approving the use of snow compactors and other chemicals.
• checking the crowd control systems
• checking the start, the nish area and the run-out from the nish
• checking the rst aid service
• appointing the course setters.
• xing the time of course setting
• overseeing the work of the course setters
95
• spot-checking of the gate panels
• opening or closing the race courses for training in consideration of the technical
preparations and the prevailing weather conditions
• determining the method of the competitor’s course inspection
• inspection of the course before the race
• determining the number of forerunners for each run and setting the start order of
the forerunners
• debrieng the forerunners as necessary
• changing the start order in consideration of course conditions and in extraordinary
conditions
• changing the start intervals
• giving instructions to and obtaining information from the gate judges.
For DH:
• arrangement of an additional competitor’s inspection in unusual weather
conditions
• shortening the ocial training
• positioning of yellow zones
• checking on the setting of gates
• changing the position and distance of the gates or adding extra gates as indicated
by the experience gained in the training runs. Following signicant changes, the
competitors must be allowed at least one more training run on the course.
601.4.6.2 From an organizational viewpoint particularly by:
• ranking of the competitors for the draw
• division of the competitors without points into groups according to some
determined basis
• granting of re-runs
• cancellation of the race (beforehand) if snow conditions are unsuitable
• if the recommendations of the Technical Advisor’s report have not been carried out
• if the rst aid and medical service are inadequate or missing
• if the crowd control is insucient
• shortening the course, if snow or weather conditions make this appear necessary
• interruption of the race if the prerequisites of art. 624 are present,
• termination of the race if the prerequisites of art. 625 are present.
601.4.6.3 From a disciplinary viewpoint particularly by:
• decision on a proposal of the Technical Delegate or a Jury member to exclude a
competitor for lack of physical and technical ability
• decisions on limitation of quotas for ocials, technicians and medical personnel
for admission to the race-course
• imposition of sanctions
• decisions on protests
• issue of particular directives throughout the entire event
601.4.7 Questions not Covered by Rules
In general, the Jury makes decisions on all questions not claried by the Alpine
Competition Regulations.
601.4.8 Radios
At all competitions published in the Ski Calendar, the Jury members plus Start
and Finish Referee must be equipped with radios. These must function on a single
96
reserved frequency and be free of interference.
601.4.9 Duties of the TD for all events
601.4.9.1 Before the race
The TD
• reviews the homologation le and consults the organizer about the possible
existence of a special authorization.
If he establishes that no homologation exists, the Jury must cancel the race (see 650).
He reads the TD reports about previous events at the site and checks whether the
improvements proposed in these reports have been carried out.
• inspects the competition courses.
• supervises the compliance with art. 704 and U1003.2 concerning the ocial
training.
• spot checks the gate panels.
• collaborates in the administrative and technical preparations.
• checks the ocial entry lists, including seed points.
• checks on the presence of sucient radios for all members of the Jury (with
separate frequencies).
• takes note of the accreditation and the authorization for entry to the course.
• checks over the race courses with regard to preparation, marking, crowd control,
as well as the layout of start and nish areas.
• supervises the course setting together with the Jury.
• checks on the location of the television towers and sees they are adequately
protected if necessary.
• supervises the locations of the rst aid service along the course as well as the
organization of the medical care.
• checks on all technical installations such as timekeeping, hand timing,
communications, transport of people, etc.
• is present in the race area during all ocial training.
• takes part in all meetings of the Jury and of the team captains.
• works closely together with the ocials of the Organizing Committee.
• is the chair of the Jury with a casting vote in case of a tie.
• if necessary, appoints members to the Jury.
• has the right, if a SL or GS cannot be carried out on the homologated course
because of “force majeure”, to move the race to a “substitute course” proposed
by the organizer. This is on the explicit condition that the necessary homologation
measures can be fullled. For DH and SG there is only the possibility of shortening
the run on a homologated course. The minimum prescribed vertical drops must,
however, be observed in any case.
601.4.9.2 During the race
The TD
• must be present in the course area.
• works closely with the Jury, the team captains and the coaches.
• observes that the valid rules and directives are obeyed in regard to race equipment.
• supervises the technical and organizational conduct of the event.
• advises the organization concerning the observance of the rules and regulations
and directives of the Jury.
601.4.9.3 After the race
97
The TD
• helps with the compilation of the Referee’s report.
• calculates the race and penalty points for the individual races. If the points are
calculated by computer, it is the TD’s duty to re-check the points and conrm their
accuracy with his personal signature. Above all, he checks the correct use of the
corresponding F value for each event.
• presents properly submitted protests to the Jury for decision.
• signs the ocial result lists established by the race secretary and gives the
authorization for the award ceremony.
• completes the TD report, including any supplementary reports and is responsible
for their dispatch within three days to the Competition Services and the other
appropriate recipients.
• checks that the results are correct on the U.S. Ski & Snowboard website.
• presents to Competition Services, any applicable proposals for changes in the
competition rules on the basis of practical experience at the event in question.
601.4.9.4 In general
The TD
• decides on questions not covered or insuciently covered by the Alpine
Competition Regulations, in so far as these have not already been decided by the
Jury and do not fall within the scope of other authorities.
• works closely with the Referee and Assistant Referee.
• has the right to propose to the Jury the exclusion of competitors from participating
in the race.
• has the right to obtain support from the Organizing Committee and all ocials
under its jurisdiction in all matters necessary to the fulllment of his duties.
U601.4.10 Duties and rights of the Referee
• the Referee and Assistant Referee at events must be a current Coach or Ocial
member and must have a current Referee certication, and must have attended a
bi-seasonal Continuing Education Clinic prior to the event.
• U.S. National Team coaching sta members must have attended an Ocials’
Continuing Education Clinic prepared and presented by qualied U.S. National
Team sta prior to the event
• supervises Drawing of the start numbers
• at the end of the rst run, and again at the end of the race, the Referee will receive
the Start and Finish Referees’ reports, and any other ocial reports regarding
breach of rules and disqualication.
• checks, signs and posts the Referee’s Report on the ocial notice board at the end
of each run, and at the end of the race, including a list of disqualied competitors,
the gate numbers where the faults occurred, the name of the relevant gate judge of
judges, and the exact time of posting.
• sends a report to Competition Services should unusual circumstances arise or
in the event of a dierence of opinion among the Jury members or in the case of
severe injury to a competitor.
601.4.10.1 Collaboration with the TD
The Referee and the Assistant Referee must work very closely with the TD.
601.4.11 The Technical Advisor
To support the Jury, U.S. Ski & Snowboard can appoint technical advisors for
all categories of races. The technical advisor has the right to express his opinion
98
within the Jury without the right to vote.
601.5 U.S. Ski & Snowboard can impose sanctions against a Jury or individual Jury
members.
602 The Technical Delegate (TD)
602.1 Denition
602.1.1 The primary duties of the TD
• to make sure that the rules and directions of U.S. Ski & Snowboard are followed
• to see that the event runs smoothly
• to advise the organizers within the scope of their duties
• to be the ocial representative of U.S. Ski & Snowboard
602.1.2 Responsibility
The TD structure comes under the responsibility of the Alpine Sports Committee.
The Alpine Technical Delegate Working Group exercises this authority.
602.1.3 Prerequisites
The TD must hold a valid Alpine Ocials membership and TD certication and
must have attended the annual Technical Delegate Workshop prior to the event.
(exception art. 602.3).
602.1.4 Development
602.1.4.1 The development for a TD is:
• applicant - Nomination and two seconds from a level 3 or higher TD.
• approval of Divisional Alpine Ocials Committee.
• written entrance examination with a passing grade of 75% or better.
• successful completion of candidacy under senior TD’s.
• TD.
602.1.4.2 Each division is responsible for the identication and education of aspiring TD’s.
602.1.5 Training
602.1.5.1 The basic training of the applicant is the responsibility of the sponsoring division.
602.1.5.2 To be certied as a Level 1 TD, an ocial must be certied as a Level 2 Referee
and Level 1 Timing and Calculations.
• in the alternative, an ocial must be certied as a Level 1 Timing and Calculations,
Level 1 Chief of Race and Level 2 Jury Advisor.
• in the alternative, an ocial must be certied as a Level 1 Timing and Calculations,
a Level 2 Chief of Race and Level 1 Jury Advisor.
U602.1.5.10 It is strongly recommended that the applicant also maintain Alpine Ocials
certication as Chief of Race.
U602.1.5.11 Advancement of certication level.
• Level 1 to Level 2 - 10 workdays as a TD and favorable written recommendation
from two higher level TDs.
• Level 2 to Level 3 - should work an additional minimum 10 work days as a TD,
RF, or CR, shadow Level 3 or higher or FIS TD at one speed event and receive
favorable recommendation, receive two written recommendations/evaluations,
pass the Level 3 Technical Delegate exam with a score of 80% or higher and be
approved by the Divisional/Regional AO Committee, the TD Working Group, the
Technical Subcommittee and the ASC.
• Level 3 to Level 4 - a minimum of ve years of outstanding service as a Level 3
Technical Delegate, and approval of the Divisional/Regional AO Committee, the
TD Working Group, the Technical Subcommittee and the ASC.
U602.1.8 Participation
99
U602.1.8.1 A Technical Delegate should work as an assigned TD a minimum of two days
every season and must work as an assigned TD at least once every two years.
U602.1.8.2 Unless an exception is granted by the Divisional/Regional AO Chair, TDs are
required to attend an approved TD Workshop annually prior to the event. They
must attend a bi-seasonal Workshop in order to retain current certication.
U602.1.8.3 Failure to meet the above participation requirements will result in loss of TD
certication status.
U602.1.8.4 If a TD misses an update for 2 seasons, the TD may be reinstated to the previous
level by attending an approved workshop.
U602.1.8.5 If a TD misses an update for three or more seasons, the TD may be reinstated by
passing the appropriate examination, i.e., Level 1 or 2 must pass the Level 1 exam,
Level 3 or 4 must pass the Level 3 exam.
U602.1.8.6 A TD may not violate the update rule for a second time and maintain TD
certication.
602.2 Appointment
602.2.2 For all events the appointment is made by U.S. Ski & Snowboard or its designate.
602.2.4 A TD cannot be a member of the local organizing association.
602.3 TD replacement
602.3.4 If the TD is unable to serve, a deputy for the absent TD is to be named on the spot
by the team captains. The replacement must likewise meet the requirements of art.
602.1.3.
In an emergency, a TD may also be named who does not meet these requirements
but is competent to ensure the conduct (continuation) of the race. In the choice of
this person, stringent criteria are to be used.
602.3.5 The replacement TD has the same rights and duties as the TD originally appointed.
602.4 Organization of the Assignment
602.4.1 The organizer must establish early contact with the TD.
602.4.2 Cancellations or postponements of events must be announced to the TD and to the
Competition Services immediately, taking into account any applicable deadlines.
U602.4.3 For DH and SG, the TD should arrive at the competition site at least 48 hours
before the draw for the rst training. In all other events, this should be at least 24
hours before the draw for the event concerned.
602.5 Expense Accounts
The TD has a right to reimbursement for:
• automobile mileage to the event at IRS guidelines per mile, or in the case of air
travel, the cost of coach air fare.
• lodging, the cost of a single room for the time period from the required date of
arrival to the end of the event. If organizers provide appropriate volunteer housing,
the TD must use it.
• meals that are accompanied by invoices. If organizer provides meals, the TD must
utilize these.
• reasonable out-of-pocket expenses (i.e., postage, telephone, etc.).
U602.6 Sanctions
Sanctions can be imposed against TDs.
603 Course Setter
603.1 Prerequisites
U603.1.1 Course setters at all events must be a current Coach or Ocial member and
must have a current Referee certication, and must have attended a bi-seasonal
100
Continuing Education Clinic prior to the event.
603.1.3 For DH, the course setter must be acquainted with the particular race course.
603.2 Appointment
603.2.3 The appointment is made by the Jury. For competitions in two runs, each run is to
be set by a dierent course setter. One of the two course setters can be named by
the organizer.
U603.2.4 Course setter appointment should, when possible, include a woman.
603.3 Supervision of the Course Setters
603.3.1 The work of the course setters is supervised by the Jury.
603.4 Organization of the assignment
The assignment is managed by the Jury.
603.5 Replacement of Course Setters
603.5.2 The Jury names a replacement course setter.
603.5.3 The replacement course setter should have the same qualications as the original
course setter.
603.6 Rights of the Course Setter
603.6.1 To recommend the introduction of changes in the competition terrain and in the
safety measures.
603.6.2 Availability of a sucient number of helpers for the setting of the course, so that
the course setter can concentrate solely on setting the course.
603.6.3 Provision of all necessary materials by the Chief of Course Equipment.
603.6.4 Immediate completion of the nishing touches to the race course.
603.7 Duties of the Course Setter
603.7.1 In order to set the course appropriately, respecting the terrain, the snow cover
and the ability of the participating competitors, the course setter conducts a pre-
inspection of the race terrain in the presence of the TD, Referee, Chief of Race and
Chief of Course.
603.7.2 The course setter sets the race course respecting existing course protection measures
and course preparation. The course setter must take speed control into consideration.
603.7.3 For all events, the course setter has to set gates according to the respective rules.
603.7.4 The courses must be set and ready in time so that the competitors are not disturbed
during course inspection.
603.7.5 The course setters should take care that the dierence between the winning times
of each run of SL and GS will not be too great.
603.7.6 The course setting is a task of the course setter alone. He is responsible for
adhering to the rules of the Alpine Competition Regulations and may be advised
by members of the Jury, and by the technical advisor in DH and SG, if present.
603.7.7 The course setter must participate in all team captains’ meetings at which a report
is to be made about their course.
604.2 Rights and Duties of the Team Captains and Trainers
The team captains and trainers must be accredited by the organizers according to
quota. The accreditation gives the following rights and duties:
• to be a member of the Jury,
• to be nominated as a course setter if these have not been appointed by U.S. Ski &
Snowboard or if the appointed person is not present,
• to be issued with a pass or armband during the training or competition. Some
organizers may not be able to provide complimentary lift tickets for participating
coaches as they are passing along costs from the host resort,
101
• to be issued with a pass or armband stating the function or marked Course.
604.2.1 Team captains and trainers must obey the rules and the decisions of the Jury, and
must behave in a proper and sportsmanlike manner.
604.2.2 A team captain or trainer must fulll the duties he has accepted as a member of the
Jury, or as a course setter.
604.3 In accordance with ACR 213.4 and 216 the time and location of the rst team
captain’s meeting and of the draw must be shown in the program. An actual
meeting, attended in person or online by team captains, Jury, and race ocials is
an inseparable part of the competition and is important for communication of Jury
instructions, support of the OC, OC requests and information as well as a critical
element for risk management and liability related matters. ACR 216 and 217 apply
in all cases.
605 Forerunners
U605.1 The organizer is obliged to provide at least three forerunners who meet all the
rules, including appropriate membership (e.g., Competitor, Short-Term Alpine,
Non-Scored Athlete, Master). General members are allowed to forerun, but
not compete. In extraordinary conditions, the Jury may increase the number of
forerunners. The Jury may designate dierent forerunners for each run.
Adult (18+) forerunners at events that include minor participants (U18 and
younger) are required to be in good standing with a membership that includes
SafeSport training and background screening.
The “Alpine Master” and “Short-Term Alpine Master” memberships do not meet
this requirement and are not allowed.
U18 and younger forerunners, including those with General and Short-Term
Memberships, at Masters events where competitors may have the “Master” or
“Short-Term Alpine Master” memberships that do not include SafeSport Training
and background screening must be accompanied by a parent or legal guardian or
at least two (2) U.S. Ski & Snowboard members with a membership that includes
SafeSport training and background screening (e.g., Coach w/Ocial, Ocial,
Volunteer, Masters w/requirements).
As with all U18 and younger events, if U18 athletes will be forerunning a Masters
event, a communication pertaining to athlete safety policies must be sent to all
participants, and the QR code must be posted at the registration area. The forerunner
is a member of the organizing committee. In DH, the forerunners should participate
in all training runs.
605.2 The forerunners must wear forerunner start numbers (bibs).
605.3 The nominated forerunners should have the skiing ability to ski the course in a
racing manner.
605.4 Forerunners are not permitted to start in the competition.
605.5 The Jury determines the forerunners and their start order. After an interruption of
the race, additional forerunners may be authorized as necessary.
605.6 The times of the forerunners should not be published.
605.7 Upon request, the forerunners must report to members of the Jury regarding the
snow conditions, the visibility and the race line, as the case requires.
606 Competitor Equipment
606.1 Start numbers (Bibs)
Shape, size, lettering and attachment method must not be altered. The gure must
be at least 12 cm high and easily legible. The individual letters may not surpass a
height of 10 cm.
102
606.3 Ski brakes
For competitions and ocial training, only skis with ski brakes may be used.
Competitors and forerunners without ski brakes are not allowed to start.
U606.4 Helmets
In all events, all competitors and forerunners are obliged to wear crash helmets that
conform to the equipment rules. See specications as an addendum later in this
chapter.
606.5 Equipment Rules
See specications as an addendum later in this chapter.
607 Age Limits
607.1 The competition year is July 1 - June 30 of the following year. A competitor’s class
is determined by their year of birth.
U607.2 U18 athletes can compete in international competitions up to a maximum limit in
the tech events (GS and SL) of 30 total starts for YOB 2007 and 35 total starts for
YOB 2006. Tech event starts at Olympic Winter Games, World Championships,
World Cup, World Junior Championships, Youth Olympic Games, U.S. Alpine
Championships, and U18 Nationals are exempt from this limitation. There is no
limit to participation in the speed events of DH, SG, and AC.
607.3 Classication of competitors:
SR Ages 21 and older born 2002 or earlier
U21 Ages 18-20 born 2003, 2004 or 2005
U18 Ages 16 and 17 born 2006 or 2007
U16 Ages 14 and 15 born 2008 or 2009
U14 Ages 12 and 13 born 2010 or 2011
U12 Ages 10 and 11 born 2012 or 2013
U10 Ages 8 and 9 born 2014 or 2015
U8 Ages 7 and younger born 2016 and later
U607.4 Regional and divisional associations may dene additional classes for competitors
age 6 or younger.
U607.5 Regional and divisional associations may establish procedures that allow
competitors to compete:
• as a member of a higher or lower-level class then that of their chronological age,
and/or
• in races that are conducted on courses that exceed the course setting specications
for their class. (This does not apply to vertical drop.)
U607.5.1 These procedures must be based on either:
• objective evidence that the competitor can compete successfully within the higher
class, or
• careful screening by a disinterested, knowledgeable group that determines that
the competitor can compete successfully within the higher class.
U607.5.2 The procedures must require that the competitor and his parents complete and sign
the Ski Up Waiver.
610 Start, Finish, Timing and Calculations
611 Technical Installations
611.1 Communications and Cabling
In all competitions, it is highly recommended that there is multiple communication
(telephone or radios, etc.) between the start and nish. Voice communication
between starter and nish must be assured by xed wire connection or radio. In
103
case of radio, this must be a separate channel from that used by any other function
of the ROC.
611.2 Timing Equipment
For all sanctioned events (scored and non-scored), electronic timers, start gates,
and photocells homologated by the FIS must be used. A list of these approved
devices will be published on the FIS website. Races using timing equipment other
than those on the homologated FIS list will not be considered for scoring to the
national points list.
611.2.1 Electric Timing
For all competitions that are scored to the national points list, two synchronized
electronically isolated systems operating in time-of-day must be used. One system
will be designated system A (main system), the other system B (back-up system)
prior to the beginning of the race.
Time of day times must be immediately and automatically sequentially recorded
on printed strips at the maximum precision of the timing device according to the
requirements for homologation. The nal result is calculated by subtracting the
start time from the nish time for each skier’s run and is then expressed to 1/100th
(0.01) precision by truncating the calculated net time on course.
All times used for the nal result must come from system A. If there is a failure of
system A, a calculated net time from System B must be used following the same
procedure set out in 611.3.2.1. It is not permitted to substitute time-of-day times
from system B for use with system A for the purpose of net time calculations.
For all events, system A must be connected to its respective start gate contact.
System B must be separately connected to another electronically isolated start gate
contact.
Refer to the FIS Timing Booklet for more details regarding cabling and complete
wiring descriptions, diagrams and start gate installations.
All timing equipment and technical installations should be set up or protected in
such a way that danger to the competitor is avoided where possible.
Synchronization of the timing systems must occur as close as possible to the
scheduled start for the rst run of the day. Synchronization of all systems must be
maintained throughout each run. Timers must not be re-synchronized during any
run.
611.2.1.1 Start Gate
The start gate must have separate electronically isolated switch contacts for
triggering the start inputs of both system A & B. If a start gate or start wand
requires replacement during a run, it must be replaced with identical equipment in
the same position.
611.2.1.2 Photocells
For all scored events, there must be two photocell system(s) homologated by
the FIS installed at the nish line. One is connected to system A. The other is
connected to system B.
Procedures and regulations for start gates and photocells are found in the FIS
Timing Booklet.
611.2.1.3 Start Clock
For DH, SG and GS, the use of a start clock that provides at least an acoustic
countdown signal on the xed start interval as prescribed by the Jury should be
used as an aid to race management.
U611.2.2 Hand Timing
104
Manual (hand) timing, completely separate and independent of the electronic
timing, must be used for all competitions listed in the calendar. Stopwatches or
hand-operated, battery-powered, timers that are installed at both the start and the
nish and capable of expressing times to at least 1/100th (0.01) precision qualify
as proper hand timing devices. They must be synchronized prior to the start of
the rst run, preferably with the same time of day as system A and system B.
Printed records, either automatic or handwritten, of recorded hand times must be
immediately available at the start and at the nish.
611.2.3 Presentation of Times
Organizers should provide appropriate facilities for continuous presentation of all
registered times of all competitors.
611.2.4 Timing without Cable
For non-championship races it is permitted to use homologated timing equipment
in such a way that hill cable connection between start and nish is not required.
Refer to the FIS Timing Booklet for a detailed discussion of how this is possible.
611.3 Timing
611.3.1 With electronic timing, the time is taken when a competitor crosses the nish line
and triggers the beam between the photo cells.
In case of a fall at the nish where the competitor does not come to a full stop, the
time can be taken without both of the competitor’s feet having crossed the nish
line.
For the registered time to become valid, the competitor must immediately
completely cross the nish line with or without skis. With hand timing the time
will be taken when any part of the competitor crosses the nish line.
The nish controller determines the correctness of passage across the nish line.
611.3.2 In the case of a failure of the main electronic timing system (system A), the results
of the electronic back-up system (system B) will be valid as per art. 611.2.1.
In case of a failure in the lines of the timing system between start and nish, this
back-up system will allow the calculation of the times to 1/100ths of a second.
In the case that time of day from either system A or system B are not available for a
competitor, the calculated time of day as per art. 611.3.2.1 will be considered valid.
611.3.2.1 Utilization of times taken by hand or System B
Hand times may be used in the ocial results after a correction has been calculated.
Calculation of the correction:
Subtract the electronic time of day from the time of day taken by hand for the
10 competitors starting before the missing time. If there are not 10 times before,
complete the calculation with the remaining times after the missed time. The sum
of the 10-time of day dierences is divided by 10 and rounded up or down (0.044
→ 0.04, 0.045 → 0.05) to give the correction which must be applied to the hand
time of the competitor without an electronic time.
611.3.2.2 Photo Finish
A Photo Finish System may be used to determine a competitor’s nish time. In case
of a failure of system “A” and “B”, and where the competition has been recorded by
the Photo Finish System, this time must be used in place of hand-timing without any
correction. The photo nish time is taken when any part of the competitor ́s body
rst crosses the Finish line. The photo nish result is to be provided to the Jury only.
611.3.3 The ocial timing strips from the printer will be given to the Technical Delegate
for review. They will be kept by the OC until the ocial approval of the race or
after any appeal dealing with timing or race results.
105
The ocial technical timing report form must accompany the race results and must
be reviewed by the Chief of Timing and reviewed and signed by the TD as his
approval of the race.
All printed records from system A, system B and hand timing must be retained by
the OC for a period of three (3) months after the competition or after any appeal
dealing with timing or race results.
611.3.4 When the ocial printing timer allows manual input or correction of a time, some
type of indication (star, asterisk or other) concerning any eected change must be
printed on all timing documentation.
611.3.5 Computer software calculating net times must use the precision of the time of day
as used in the timing device.
611.4 Private Timing and Speed Measurement Equipment of the Teams
Any request to install such equipment has to be made to the Jury by the team
captain concerned and the Jury decides concerning approval of the installation.
612 Start and Finish Ocials
612.1 The Starter
The Starter must synchronize his watch with those of the assistant starter and by
telephone or radio with the chief timekeeper within ten minutes of the start. The
starter is responsible for the warning signal and the start command as well as for
the accuracy of the intervals between these signals. He assigns the supervision of
the competitors to the assistant starter.
612.2 The Assistant Starter
The assistant starter is responsible for calling the competitors to the start in their
correct order.
612.3 The Start Recorder
The start recorder is responsible for recording the actual start times of all
competitors.
612.4 The Chief Timekeeper
The chief timekeeper is responsible for the accuracy of the timing. He synchronizes
the watches with the starter as shortly before and after the race as is possible. He
must publish unocial times as quickly as possible (on the score-board, etc.). If
the electric timing fails, the chief timekeeper must communicate immediately with
the Start Referee and the TD.
612.5 The Assistant Timekeeper
Two assistant timekeepers operate stopwatches according to art. 611.2.2.
One assistant timekeeper maintains a complete record with the registered times of
all competitors.
612.6 The Finish Controller
The nish controller has the following duties:
• supervision of the section between the last gate and the nish.
• supervision of the proper crossing of the nish line.
• recording of the order of nishing of all racers who complete the course.
• if a nish controller is not assigned, the Finish Referee assumes these duties
612.7 The Chief of Calculations
The chief of calculations is responsible for quick and accurate calculation of results.
He supervises the immediate duplication of unocial results and the publication
of ocial results after expiration of the protest interval, or after any protests have
been dealt with.
106
613 The Start
613.1 The Start Area
The Start Area must be closed o to everyone except the starting competitor,
accompanied by only one trainer and the start ocials.
The start area must be protected appropriately against inclement weather. A special
roped o area must be provided for trainers, team captains, service personnel, etc.,
in which they may take care of the waiting competitors without being interrupted
by the public. An adequate shelter must be prepared for the competitors waiting for
the call to start.
The competitor enters the dened start hut with both skis attached without any
covers on them.
613.2 The Start Ramp
The Start Ramp shall be prepared in such a way that the competitors can stand
relaxed on the starting line and can quickly reach full speed after leaving the start.
613.3 Start Procedure
No ocial or attendant who could possibly give an advantage to or disturb the
starting competitor can be behind him. All outside help is forbidden. By order of
the starter, the competitor must plant his poles in front of the start line, or where
indicated. The starter must not touch the competitor at the start.
Pushing o from the start posts or other aids is forbidden, and the competitor must
start only with the help of his ski poles.
U613.4 Start Signals
10 seconds before the start, the starter will tell each competitor “10 seconds”. Five
seconds before the start, he should count “5, 4, 3, 2, 1” and then give the start
command “Go”.
(For SL see 805.3).
If possible, an automatic audible signal is to be used. The starter will let the
competitor see the start clock. Use of start clock/beep does not replace verbal
command.
613.5 Start Timing
The start timing must measure the exact time the competitor crosses the start line
with his leg below the knee.
613.6 Delayed Start
A competitor who is not ready to start on time will be sanctioned. The Start Referee
may however excuse such a delay if, in his opinion the delay is due to “force
majeure”.
For example, breakdown of a competitor’s personal equipment, or minor sickness
of a competitor, does not constitute “force majeure”. In case of doubt, the Jury may
allow the start provisionally.
613.6.1 The Start Referee makes the decisions after consultation with the Jury (according to
613.6.2 and 613.6.3) and must record the start numbers and names of competitors
who were not allowed to start because of late appearance, or who were allowed to
start in spite of late appearance, or who were allowed to start provisionally.
613.6.2 In the case of xed start intervals, the delayed competitors may start at the xed
interval after he has reported to the Start Referee, in accordance with the decision of
the Jury. The Start Referee informs the Jury as to when (after which start number) a
delayed competitor is starting.
613.6.3 In the case of irregular start intervals, the delayed competitor will start according to
art. 805.3. The Start Referee informs the Jury as to when (after which start number)
107
a delayed competitor is starting.
613.7 Valid and False Starts
In competitions with a xed start interval the competitor must start on the start
signal. The start time is valid if it occurs within the following limits: 5 seconds
before and 5 seconds after the ocial start time. A competitor who does not start
within that space of time will be disqualied.
The Start Referee must inform the Referee of the start numbers and names of the
competitors who made a false start or have contravened the starting rules.
614 Course and Competition
614.1 Course
614.1.1 Technical Parts of a Competition Course
Start and nish installations, television towers, measuring equipment, sponsor
advertising equipment, etc. are necessary items for a competition.
614.1.2 Course Setting
614.1.2.1 Assistance
Assistance must be provided for the course setter, at a time to be xed by the Jury,
so that he can concentrate on the actual course setting and not be distracted by
fetching poles, etc.
The Chief of Course Equipment must provide enough of the following:
• enough blue and red slalom poles
• a corresponding number of panels, divided by colors
• hammers, drills, gate-keys, wedges etc.
• enough gate numbers
• coloring substance for marking the position of the poles.
614.1.2.2 Marking of the gates
The positions of the gate poles may be marked with an easily recognizable coloring
substance which remains visible throughout the entire race.
614.1.2.3 Numbering the gates
The gates must be numbered from top to bottom of the course. Start and nish are
not counted.
614.1.2.4 Marking of the course and terrain
In DH and in SG the course should be marked using:
• on the inside and/or outside of the racing line before and after the gate
• small pine needles or similar material spread on the course
and/or
• colored dye used vertically from gate to gate as well as horizontally across the
course or the inside and/or outside of the racing line before and after the gate
notably on the approaches indicating changes in terrain, jumps, etc.
614.1.2.5 Spare Poles
The Chief of Course Equipment is responsible for the availability and correct
placing of enough spare poles. The poles are to be placed so that the competitors
are not mislead by them.
U614.1.3 Warm-up slope
Appropriate warm-up slopes should be made available.
614.1.4 Closing and modication of the course
A course is closed from the time that the course setting begins. Nobody except for
the Jury is permitted to change gates, gate panels, markings, etc. or modify the
course structure (jumps, bumps, etc.) on a closed course.
108
Competitors are not permitted to enter a closed competition course.
Trainers, servicemen etc., who are allowed on a closed competition course are to
be decided by the Jury.
Photographers and camera teams are allowed into the closed course area for the
necessary documentation of the competition. Their total number can be limited by
the Jury. They will be located by the Jury where possible and may only remain in
this area.
The Jury or the Organizing Committee may close a course or sections of a course to
competitors, trainers, media and service personnel outside of the actual competition
or training times for preparation and maintenance purposes.
614.1.5 Course changes
In cases of necessary changes on the course, such as small relocation of gates, an
additional inspection or training run is not necessary.
Details must be communicated to all team-captains and competitors must be
informed by the Start Referee at the start.
614.2 Competition
614.2.1 Passage of the Gates
A gate must be passed according to art. 661.4.1.
614.2.2 Interdiction to Continue after a Gate Fault
If a competitor misses a gate, he must no longer continue through further gates.
U614.2.3 Interdiction to Continue after a competitor stops
If a competitor comes to a complete stop (e.g., after a fall), he must no longer
continue through previous or further gates. This interdiction is valid in all events
with a xed start interval (DH, SG, GS, Parallel bracketed rounds). Only exception
is for SL (661.4.1) and Parallel qualication rounds (U1232.1.1), as long as the
competitor
• does not interfere with the run of the next competitor, or
• has not been passed by the next competitor.
614.3 Inspection
614.3.1 Jury inspection
On race day, the Jury inspects the course and has to conrm the program for the
day. Team Captains may accompany the Jury.
614.3.2 Competitor inspection
The competitor inspection is held after Jury inspection and after the Jury has
opened the course and is normally inspected, from top to bottom of the course.
The course must be in racing condition from the time the competitor’s inspection
starts and the competitors must not be disturbed during the inspection by workers
on the course or similar. The competitors are authorized to study the nal setting
of the course by either skiing down at the side of the course at low speed, or side
slipping through the gates (inspection). Skiing through gates or making practice
turns parallel to those required by gates on the course is not allowed. Competitors
must carry their start numbers. Fenced, roped or blocked o sections of the course
or gates must be respected. By the end of the inspection time, Competitors have
to be outside the race course. Racers are not permitted to enter the course on foot
without skis.
614.3.3 Jury decision
The time and duration of the Competitors inspection is determined by the Jury
and scheduled at the team captains meeting. If necessary (e.g., because of special
weather conditions), the Jury may decide on special methods of competitors
109
inspection.
615 The Finish
615.1 The Finish Area
615.1.1 The nish area should be plainly visible to competitors approaching the nish. It
must be wide with a gently sloped smooth run out.
615.1.2 In setting the course with gates particular attention should be paid to directing
competitors across the nish on a natural line adapted to the terrain.
615.1.3 The nish area is to be fenced in. Any unauthorized entry is not allowed.
615.1.4 Finish installations and closures should be set up or secured through suitable
protection measures.
615.1.6 The competitor must leave the nish area through the ocial exit with all the
competition equipment used in the race.
615.2 The Finish Line and its Markings
The nish line is marked by two poles or vertical banners which may be connected
by a horizontal banner. In DH and SG races the nish must be no less than 15 m
wide; in SL and GS no less than 10 m wide. In exceptional cases, the Jury may
decrease this distance on the spot for technical reasons or because of the terrain.
The width of the nish is considered to be the distance between the two nish poles
or banners. The supports used to mount the timing devices must also be at least this
far apart.
The timing supports can usually be placed behind the nish poles or banners,
on the downhill side. The nish line must be clearly marked horizontally with
coloring substance.
615.3 Crossing of the nish line and recording of the times
The nish line must be crossed:
• on both skis, or
• on one ski, or
• with both feet in case of a fall between the last gate and the nish line. In this case
the time is taken when any part of the competitor’s body stops the timekeeping
system.
615.4 Report
The Finish Referee must make a report to the Referee immediately after the race or
the ocial training.
617 Calculation and Announcement of Results
617.1 Unocial Times
Times taken by the timekeepers must be considered unocial times. They should
be posted on a score-board which should be readily visible from the area provided
for the competitors who have nished, and from the press area. Whenever possible,
unocial times should be announced to the public over loud-speakers.
617.2. Announcement of Unocial Times and Disqualications
U617.2.1 As soon as possible after completion of the race, unocial times and
disqualications must be published on the ocial notice board.
The time limit for protest is counted from the moment of this announcement.
(643.4, 643.5)
617.2.2 Oral announcement of disqualications may replace the publication on the ocial
notice board. It can be decided that protests can be delivered verbally to the Referee
at the nish within 15 minutes after the announcement of the disqualication.
Protests submitted after this are considered null and void. The team captains must
be informed beforehand of the announcement and protest procedure.
110
617.2.3 The ocial notice board can be replaced by an ocial communication channel
announced at the Team Captains’ Meeting by the Jury.
617.3 Ocial Results
617.3.1 Results are determined from the ocial times of those competitors who have been
ocially classied.
617.3.2 Combined results are calculated by adding together the race times obtained in each
event of the combined event (or by adding the race points).
617.3.3 If two or more competitors have the same time or the same number of points, the
racer with the higher start number must be listed rst on the ocial list of results.
617.3.4 The ocial result list must contain:
• the name of the organizing club or association
• the name of the competition, the site, event, category, and gender
• the date of the race
• all technical data such as the name of the course, altitude at start and nish,
vertical drop, homologation number and, for DH and SG, the length of the course
• the names and aliations of the members of the Jury
• for each run, the names and aliations of the course setter and the forerunners,
the number of gates (SL, GS & SG between brackets number of direction changes)
and the start time
• the weather, the snow conditions on the course and the air temperature at start and
nish recorded at the time of race start.
• all details concerning the competitors, nish order, start number, code number,
name and rst name, aliation, time and race points
• the start number, code number, name, rst name and aliation of those
competitors who were not at the start, did not nish or were disqualied in each run
• the names of the ocial service companies, e.g., timing company, computer
service etc.
• the codex and F value
• the penalty calculation sheet
• the signature of the Technical Delegate.
619 Award Ceremony
The award ceremony must not be held before the completion of the race and not
before the Technical Delegate has authorized it.
The organizer has the right to present the probable winners before this time. This
presentation is unocial and is organized at a place dierent from that of the
ocial award ceremony.
620 Start Order
621 Group Draw and Start Order
621.1 The classication of competitors who are present is made by the Jury
U621.2 Except for events for which an alternate method has been approved, seed points
shall be used for the classication of competitors. If a competitor does not appear
in the last valid seed points list, or does not supply a conrmation of national points
issued by U.S. Ski & Snowboard, he shall be assigned to that group of competitors
without points.
U621.3 Except for events for which an alternate method has been approved, the starting
order of the competitors in all alpine competitions is determined by their seed
points (DH, SL, GS and SG). A rst group of maximum the 15 best competitors
present regardless of aliation will be drawn.
111
The group may be increased if two or more competitors share the 15th rank.
All remaining competitors start in order of their seed points. All competitors
without seed points will be drawn in the last group. If in the rst 15 competitors
present, the point dierence between one and the following competitor is too great,
the Jury will decide the number of competitors in the rst group. The rest will start
in the order of their seed points.
U621.3.1 Adaptive athletes will be seeded in special groups with start order: 16-20... 36-40...
56-60 ... etc. or by seed points, whichever is most favorable. (Placement within
groups is by national point ranking.)
621.3.3 Starting order Alpine Combined
If the SL run takes place before the DH or SG, competitors who are shown as DNS,
NPS, DNF or DSQ will start the DH or SG run with their original bib after the last
qualied competitor in the SL run.
621.4 If the number without seed points is too great, the Jury must divide them into
several groups. In this case, each team announces the groups to which it wishes
its competitors to belong. Each group is then drawn separately. The Jury should
whenever possible, take into account the observations made during the ocial
DH training and must divide the competitors from several teams fairly between
the groups without seed points. As a rule, each team who has entered competitors
without seed points puts one competitor into the rst group of competitors without
seed points.
621.5 The Jury has the right to change the starting order if they consider the condition of
the course warrants it.
U621.6 Except for events for which an alternate seeding method has been approved, the
draw must take place on the day before the race. For night races, the draw must
take place at the latest before noon on the race day.
U621.7 Except for events for which an alternate seeding method has been approved, the
rst group, and the groups without seed points in DH training, must be drawn every
day.
U621.8 Except for events for which an alternate seeding method has been approved, the
draw (rst group and groups without seed points) must be held in a team captains’
meeting.
A double draw is recommended with a simultaneous draw of the start number and
the name of the competitor.
621.9 The Jury may allow a computer assisted draw. A representative of each team is
required to sign the team entry at the team captains’ meeting before the draw is
conducted by computer.
621.10 Starting Order in Extraordinary Conditions (Snow Seed)
In extraordinary conditions, the Jury may change the starting order of a DH race, a
GS or a SG (when snowing, etc.). A group of at least 6 competitors, nominated in
advance, start before start number 1. These six competitors are drawn from among
the last 20% of the start list. They will start in reverse order of their start numbers.
621.11 Starting Order for the 2nd Run
U621.11.1 Except for events for which an alternate seeding method has been approved, in
competitions with two runs, the starting order for the second run is determined by
the result list of the rst run except for the rst 30 places.
621.11.2 For the rst 30 places the starting order is as follows:
• the 30th in the result list starts 1st
• the 29th in the result list starts 2nd
112
• the 28th in the result list starts 3rd
• the 27th in the result list starts 4th
• the 1st in the result list starts 30th
• from the 31st onward according to the result list of the rst run.
If more than one competitor is ranked 30th, the competitor with the lowest start
number will start rst.
621.11.3 Starting Order for the 2nd Run
The Jury has the right to decide no later than one hour before the start of the rst
run whether the reversed order shall be reduced to the rst 15 placed competitors
from the rst run.
U621.11.3.1 In scored and non-scored SL and GS events, competitors who are shown as DNS,
DNF, DSQ, or NPS in the rst run can start in the second run with their original
bib after the last qualied competitor has completed his run if the Jury and Race
Organizer allow. It is recommended that they be run in bib order. Announcement
of this procedure should be made at the team captains meeting.
U621.11.3.2 Adaptive athletes who qualify for special seeding in the rst run (U621.3.1)
will be seeded in special groups with start order: 16-20... 36-40... 56-60... etc. or
according to 621.11.2, whichever is most favorable. (Placement within groups will
be by the result list of the rst run.)
Adaptive athletes who are shown as DNS, DNF, DSQ, or NPS in the rst run can
start in the second run with their original bib immediately after the last qualied
competitor has competed his run. It is recommended they be run in bib order.
Announcement of this procedure should be made at the team captains’ meeting
In the case of a Flip 30 2nd run, the special group starts in the 31st position or in the
position immediately following the rst run leader when the ip is other than 30.
621.11.4 A start list for the second run must be published in good time and made available
to teams and ocials at the start for the second run.
U621.13 Alternate Classication Methods
U621.13.1 In certain races where both runs are used for scoring purposes, the second run order
may be determined by special procedures.
U621.13.2 In non-scored, and some scored races, other rules for determining start order may
apply. These must be noted in the race announcement.
U621.13.3 There are some scored events on the calendar in which modications to the start
order procedures are used. These procedures must be approved in advance by
U.S. Ski & Snowboard and the division involved, and announced on the program.
Examples include:
U621.13.3.1 College and high school team races, where seeding is done on a team basis.
U621.13.3.2 Certain U21, U18, U16 and U14 events where minimum and maximum
representation by seed group are stipulated.
U621.13.3.3 Certain events for which TRS seeding has been approved by the Alpine Sport
Committee.
622 Start Intervals
622.1 Regular intervals
In DH, GS and SG, competitors will normally start at regular intervals of 60
seconds; for SL see art. 805.1. The Jury may x dierent intervals.
622.2 Special Start Intervals
The start intervals in DH, SG and if necessary, GS may be changed under the
following conditions:
622.2.2 The start interval is determined by the Jury.
113
622.2.3 The start interval must not be less than 40 seconds in DH and SG and 30 seconds
in GS.
623 Re-runs
623.1 Prerequisites
623.1.1 A competitor who is obstructed while racing must stop immediately after the
incident takes place and report to the nearest gate judge. He may apply to any
member of the Jury for a re-run. This claim can also be made by the team captain of
the obstructed competitor. The competitor should make his way to the nish along
the side of the course.
623.1.2 In special situations (e.g., failure of the timekeeping system or other technical
failures), the Jury may grant a re-run.
623.1.3 When a competitor is waved down by a yellow ag, he must stop immediately. He
has the right to a re-run, under the condition that the Jury considers this possible
from an organizational point of view. The Jury should ensure that the competitor’s
re-run takes place before the last competitor on the start list of the race, or training
run in the case of DH (see 705.2, 705.3).
623.2 Grounds for Interference
623.2.1 Blocking of the course by an ocial, a spectator, an animal or other obstruction.
623.2.2 Blocking of the course by a fallen competitor who did not clear the course quickly
enough.
623.2.3 Objects in the course such as a lost ski pole or the ski of a previous competitor.
623.2.4 Activities of the rst aid service which obstruct the competitor.
623.2.5 Absence of a gate that has not been promptly replaced.
623.2.6 Other similar incidents beyond the will and control of the competitor, which cause
signicant loss of speed or a lengthening of the racing line and, consequently,
aect the competitor’s time.
623.2.7 Interruption by an ocial with a “Yellow Flag” (see 623.1.3).
623.3 Validity of a Re-run
623.3.1 In case the Referee or another Jury member is unable to question the appropriate
ocials immediately or to judge the justication for the re-run he may grant a
provisional re-run, to avoid delay for the competitor. This re-run will be valid only
if it is subsequently conrmed by the Jury.
623.3.2 If the competitor was already disqualied before the incident entitling him to a re-
run, the re-run is not valid.
623.3.3 The provisional or subsequently approved run remains valid even if it proves
slower than the obstructed one.
623.4 Start Time of the Re-run
623.4.1 In the case of xed start intervals, the competitor must start at the xed interval
after he has reported to the Start Referee in accordance with the decision of the
Start Referee.
623.4.2 With non-xed start intervals, the procedure is in accordance with the provisions
of art. 805.3.
624 Interruption of the Run or Training
If an interrupted run cannot be nished on the same day, it is to be treated as a
terminated run.
624.1 By the Jury
624.1.1 to allow course maintenance.
624.1.2 for unfavorable or inconsistent weather and snow conditions
114
624.1.2.1 The race is to be restarted as soon as the work on the course has nished and if
the weather and snow conditions have so changed that a fair competition can be
assured.
624.1.2.2 A repeated interruption of the race ordered for the same reason should lead to a
termination. A DH, a SG, as well as one run of SL or GS may not last longer than
four hours.
624.2 Brief interruption
Each member of the Jury is entitled to order a brief interruption of the run, including
at the request of a gate judge.
625 Termination of a Competition
625.1 by the Jury
• if the competitors are signicantly aected by outside disturbing inuences
• if conditions arise that interfere with the fairness of the race or if the proper
conduct of the race may no longer be guaranteed.
U625.2 by the Technical Delegate
• in the case of extraordinary circumstances
626 Report
For all interrupted or terminated competitions (art. 624 and 625), a full and detailed
report is to be made by the TD to the Competition Services. The report must contain
a well-founded recommendation whether the terminated competition is to be taken
into consideration for national points or not.
627 Not permitted to Start (NPS)
A competitor will not be permitted to start in any competition who:
627.1 wears obscene names and/or symbols on clothing and equipment or behaves in an
unsportsmanlike manner in the start area (205.5, 223.1.1),
627.2 violates the rules in regard to equipment (222),
627.4 trains on a course closed for competitors (614.1.4),
627.5 in training for DH has not participated in at least one timed training run (704.8.3),
U627.6 does not wear a helmet that conforms to the Specications for Competition
Equipment (articles U606.4, U707, U807, U907, U1007, U1259.10), does not
have ski brakes on their skis (art. 606.3), or does not wear or carry an ocial start
number according to the rules (art. 606.1),
U627.8 If a competitor has actually started in a competition and is later determined by the
Jury to have been in violation of these rules the Jury must sanction the competitor.
628 Penalties
A penalty will be assessed by the Jury especially where the competitor:
628.2 alters the start number (bib) in a way that is not allowed (606.1),
628.3 does not wear or carry the ocial start number according to the rules. (606.1,
614.3),
628.4 skis through a gate or practices turns parallel to those required by gates on the
course or otherwise violates the rules of Competitors inspection (614.3),
628.5 is not ready to start on time or makes a false start (613.6, 613.7, 805.3.1, 805.4),
628.6 violates rules of the start or starts in a manner than is not permitted by the rules
(613.3),
628.7 requests a re-run which proves not to be valid (623.3.2),
628.8 continues to race after committing a gate fault or after a complete stop, or violates
the rule loss of one ski (614.2.2, 614.2.3),
628.9 fails to cross the nish line correctly (615.3),
115
628.11 does not leave the nish area through the ocial exit with all the competition
equipment used in the race (615.1.7),
628.13 receives outside help during a competition (661.3),
628.14 wears obscene names and/or symbols on clothing and equipment (art. 207.1) or
behaves in an unsportsmanlike manner in the competition area (art. 205.5, 223.1.1)
628.15 has actually started in a competition and is later determined by the Jury to have
been in violation of art. 627 rules.
U628.16 continues on a DH, SG or GS course during a training run or race after a fall,
stopping, or being overtaken. Continues on course after being passed on a SL
course. Exception DH training, see art. 705.2.
U628.17 continues on a course after losing a ski except as allowed by art. U629.4.
629 Disqualications
A competitor will be disqualied if he/she:
629.1 participates in the race under false pretenses,
629.2 jeopardizes the security of persons or property or causes actual injury or damage
629.3 does not pass through a gate correctly (661.4) or does not start within the time
limits dened by art. 613.7.
U629.4 loses a ski more than two gates above the nish in SL, GS or SG or more than one
gate above the nish in DH.
This shall be considered a clear disqualication. The competitor may not continue
on the course.
640 Protests
U640.1 A Jury may only accept a protest if it is based upon physical evidence or eyewitness
testimony.
640.2 A Jury is only permitted to re-evaluate its previous decision where new evidence
exists that relates to the original Jury decision.
640.3 All Jury decisions are nal except those that may be protested under 641. Appeals
can be made as per U647.1.1.
641 Types of Protests
641.1 Against admittance of competitors or their competition equipment,
641.2 Against the course or its condition,
641.3 Against a competitor or against an ocial during the race,
641.4 Against disqualications,
641.5 Against timekeeping,
641.6 Against instructions of the Jury,
642 Place of Submittal
The various protests are to be submitted as follows:
642.1 Protests according to the art. 641.1 - 641.6 at the location designated on the ocial
notice board or at a place announced at a team captains’ meeting.
U642.2 Protest according to the art. 624 with the appropriate level appeals committee for
Jury decisions.
643 Deadlines for Submittal
643.1 Against the admittance of a competitor:
• before the draw.
643.2 Against the course or its condition:
• not later than 60 minutes before the beginning of the race.
643.3 Against a competitor or competitor’s equipment or against an ocial because of
irregular behavior during the competition:
116
• within 15 minutes after the last competitor has passed the nish.
643.4 Against disqualication:
• within 15 minutes after the posting or announcement of the disqualication.
643.5 Against the timekeeping:
• within 15 minutes after the posting of the unocial result list.
643.6 Against all instructions of the Jury:
• immediately and no later than the deadlines for submittal of protest according to
the art. 643.4.
644 Form of Protests
644.1 Protests are to be submitted in writing.
644.2 As exceptions, protests according to art. 641.3, 641.4 and 641.5 can be made
verbally (617.2.2).
644.3 Protests must be substantiated in detail. Proof must be submitted, and any evidence
must be included.
U644.4 $50 must be deposited with the submittal of the protest; $100 if the protest is
against equipment. This deposit will be returned if the protest is upheld; otherwise,
it goes to the account of the organizer or to U.S. Ski & Snowboard.
U644.4.1 The Jury may set a lesser protest fee.
644.5 A protest may be withdrawn by the protesting party before the publication of a
decision by the Jury.
In this case, the money deposit must be returned. A withdrawal of the protest is not
possible when the Jury or a member of the Jury takes, an intermediate decision for
reasons of time, e.g., a decision “with reserve”.
644.6 Protests not submitted on time or submitted without the protest fee are not to be
considered.
645 Authorization
The following are authorized to submit protests:
• participating organizations
• trainers
• team captains.
646 Settlement of Protests by the Jury
646.1 The Jury meets to deal with the protests at a predetermined place and time xed
and announced by it.
646.2 In dealing with a protest against disqualication (661.4), the gate judge and, if
needed, also the gate judge of the adjacent gate combinations or other involved
ocials, the competitor in question and the protesting team captain or trainer must
be invited by the TD or Referee.
In addition, any other requested evidence such as videotape, photos, and lms
should be checked.
646.3 At the vote on the protest, only the Jury members are to be present. The TD chairs
the proceedings. Minutes of the proceedings are to be kept and signed by all voting
members of the Jury. The decision requires a majority of all voting members of the
Jury, not just of those present. In case of a tie, the TD’s vote is decisive.
The principle of a free evaluation of the evidence is maintained. The rules on which
the decision is to be based must be applied and interpreted in such a way that fair
proceedings are guaranteed.
646.4 The decision is to be made public immediately after the proceedings by posting on
the ocial notice board with the publication time stated.
117
647 Right of Appeal
647.1 The Appeal
U647.1.1 Can be made:
• against the decisions of the Jury,
• against the recommendation of the Jury that a terminated competition should
count for national points,
• against the ocial result lists. This appeal has to be directed exclusively against
an obvious and proved calculation mistake.
U647.1.2 Appeals must be submitted to the appropriate level Jury decision appeals committee
(642.2).
647.1.3 Deadlines
U647.1.3.1 Appeals against the decisions of the Jury are to be submitted within 24 hours of
their publication.
U647.1.3.2 Appeals against the ocial results are to be submitted to U.S. Ski & Snowboard
within 30 days, including the day of the race.
647.1.4 The decision concerning appeals are taken by:
• the appropriate Jury decision Appeals Committee
647.2 Postponing eect
The evidence submitted (protest, appeal) will not cause a postponement of the
sanction.
647.3 Submission
All appeals must be in writing to be substantiated. Proof and evidence are to be
included. Appeals submitted after the deadlines (647.1.3.1 and 647.1.3.2), will be
declined by the appropriate Appeals Committee.
650 Rules about the Homologation of the Courses
U650.1 General
All sanctioned events (DH, SG, GS, and SL) both scored and non-scored, including
Masters, must be run on courses that have been approved by U.S. Ski & Snowboard
or by FIS. Courses not meeting the minimum vertical drops requirements will be
registered, and an inspection certicate provided. Registered courses are subject to
all rules pertaining to homologated courses.
U650.1.1 All FIS-homologated trails are automatically accepted as meeting national course
approval standards.
U650.1.2 A new inspection of an existing course (FIS or National) voids the previous
homologation of an existing course.
U650.1.3 Courses for night competitions
All courses used for night competitions must be approved for use with articial
light. The courses must meet the illumination standards referenced by the National
Ski Areas Association: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America,
RP-6-01 – Sports and Recreational Area Lighting, 6.24 Skiing. The approval of
these courses must be made on snow at night by the TD and Jury of the specic
competition (see also ACR Section 4 U1200).
U650.2 Request (application)
The request for the homologation or re-homologation of a course is to be directed
to Competition Services by submitting the application form and appropriate fee
and accompanied by the documents as per art. U650.3.
U650.3 Documents
The request for the homologation of a course must be accompanied by the following
118
documents or equivalents to the satisfaction of the inspector and the working group
chair (individual documents may be combined, if all the required information is
included):
U650.3.1 A description of the course, containing:
• the name of the course
• the geographical location of the course (ski area name, town/city, state)
• the start point expressed in meters above sea level
• the nish point expressed in meters above sea level
• the vertical drop expressed in meters
• the surface length (inclined length) of the course expressed in meters
• the average, maximum and minimum gradients (in percentages)
• a summary of evacuation arrangements for injured competitors and distance to
the nearest hospital in kilometers and medical facilities available on site
• possible water supply
• articial snowmaking installations
• access to the start and nish areas - the uphill transport with the turnaround time
(time necessary from Finish to Start during the event)
• a description of the places requiring nets or other protective installations
(‘protection plan’)
• contact address with telephone, fax number, postal and email address.
U650.3.2 A map in suitable scale, with contour lines and the course drawn on it, and start and
nish locations indicated, this document should show the course’s location within
the rest of the ski resort, lifts, other courses, parking lots, etc.
U650.3.3 A prole indicating the vertical drop and length of the course, approximately in the
same scale as the topographical map per 650.4.2. (Vertical to horizontal ratio of the
prole preferred to be approximately 1:1).
U650.3.4 A photograph (digital image) with adequate resolution on which the course
is marked. It must be a genuine image, preferably digital, and not a graphic
representation from a prospectus. The image should be provided for a normal
size of 8” x 10” when printed. The photograph should be taken preferably from
an opposite slope. If that is not possible, then an oblique aerial image will be
acceptable. Appropriate images from online sources are acceptable.
U650.3.5 A plan of the entire course in suitable scale with all details and data indicated, such
as lift towers, groups of trees, snow-making hydrants, snow fences, steep sections,
curves, trail intersections, etc. and information on elevations, section and resort
names. The purpose of the plan is primarily to provide condensed information
on the actual state of the course, any improvements and the location of protective
installations (nets, etc.).
U650.4 Appointment of an Inspector
The chair of the Alpine Courses Working Group will review the homologation
application and appoint an inspector to examine the course.
The inspector for DH courses must not belong to the organization requesting a rst
homologation or be from the same state.
The courses proposed for homologation must comply with the technical
requirements of articles 701, 801, 901 and 1001 (and/or according to the rules for
registered courses not meeting minimum vertical drop according to these articles).
Sucient space must be provided on DH, GS and SG courses, or on an emergency
track or road or on the competition course itself, for the evacuation of competitors
injured during the competition or training.
119
650.5 Homologation Procedure
U650.5.1 The Applicant
The applicant club or organizer will send the application requesting homologation
to Competition Services.
The homologation fee, according to the listing at usskiandsnowboard.org, shall
be submitted with the application. This sum covers the administrative costs. The
inspector’s daily per diem, travel, and living expenses must be paid to him or her
directly by the applicant (club or ski area).
U650.5.1.1 The Applicant must accompany the Inspector during the inspection, and for DH
and SG the usual course setter of the race should be present as well. If the Inspector
orders only minor improvements, the condition of the courses after completion
of these improvements must be reported to the Inspector as soon as possible. For
more extensive work, the Inspector will decide whether an additional inspection is
necessary.
U650.5.2 Competition services will check if the Applicant has reimbursed the Inspector’s
expenses and if not will require the Applicant to meet this obligation. The
homologation certicate will only be issued if all fees, and inspector expenses, are
paid.
U650.5.3 The Inspector
After the request for homologation has been received by Competition Services, that
information will be forwarded to the Chair of the Alpine Courses Working Group;
the chair will appoint an inspector. The inspector promptly contacts the applicant
about the time for the inspection. The inspector will request a copy of the required
documentation part of the inspection package as outlined in U650.3. After the
inspection, he/she writes the inspection report, noting any required improvements,
marking these on the course plan. After checking all other documents, he/she sends
the complete set of documents to the chair of the Alpine Courses Working Group.
The latter will examine and ratify them and send a copy and a certicate to each of
the following:
• U.S. Ski & Snowboard
• the applicant
• the inspector
Normally, initial inspections of a course should be done in the summer or fall. It is
left to the discretion of the inspector to decide whether, in addition to the summer
inspection, a second inspection in winter will be necessary in consideration of
dierent conditions in winter. This applies especially to any additional required
work to be completed, to protection recommendations and the placing of nets and
other devices. Rehomologations, when there are no changes made, may be done
on-snow.
U650.5.3.1 Issue and Publication of the inspection report and documentation
The chair of the Alpine Courses Working Group will ratify the inspection report and
attached documentation by signature and date. The chair may require correction of
any errors or request clarication or additional documentation by the inspector
and/or place prior to ratication.
If the inspection report is armative and no further work is needed, the chair of
the Alpine Courses Working Group will send the original of the homologation
certicate to the applicant and a digital copy to U.S. Ski & Snowboard.
The ocial list of all homologated and registered courses is available at
usskiandsnowboard.org.
120
U650.5.4 The homologation certicate itself sets out the name and type of the course and its
technical data.
For all courses, the expiry date is indicated.
The homologation certicate will only be issued if all fees, and inspector expenses,
are paid.
650.5.5 Expiration of the Application
If work requested has not been completed within four years after the inspection
is carried out, or if required documentation is incomplete, and the homologation
cannot be granted, the site (course) in question will be deleted from the list of
pending homologation applications. For further consideration, a new application,
with fee, is required.
650.5.6 Validity of the Homologation Certicate
U650.5.6.1 For DH and SG courses (both approved and registered) the certicate is valid for
ve years from the date of issue. After that, a new application for re-homologation
must be made.
U650.5.6.2 For GS and SL courses (both approved and registered) the certicate is valid for
ten years from the date of issue. After that, a new application for re-homologation
must be made.
U650.5.6.3 For all Events
Homologation certicates are valid (within periods in art. U650.5.6.1 and
U650.5.6.2) if no natural or articial changes, or changes in the regulations, or
technical requirements have occurred.
Natural changes can consist of:
• erosion, landslides or the terrain becoming overgrown.
Articial changes are:
• the construction of buildings, lifts,
• the construction of shelters, parks, roads or tracks etc.,
• the installation of snowmaking hydrants, snow retention fences or other signicant
hardware,
• signicant tree removal or earthwork.
U650.5.7 Compulsory Report
The applicant must report to the inspector and to the Alpine Courses Working Group
chair when any natural or articial changes have occurred (see art. 650.5.6.3). The
Chairman is then allowed to investigate and if necessary, order a new inspection.
U650.5.8 Additional Report of the TD
Technical Delegates may submit the Additional Report of the TD to the Chairman
of the Working Group for Alpine Courses whenever experiencing problems related
to the race courses or non-compliance with current Rules and Regulations: it is
the duty of the Chairman to investigate and in appropriate cases indicate that a
reinspection may be needed. This report is to be submitted directly to the working
group chair with a copy to the organizing club (only).
U650.5.9 Relationship Between Homologation, Snow, and Weather as well as Special
Conditions
An organizer should not depend entirely on the homologation of a course, but also
take note of the prevailing snow and weather conditions (e.g., a homologated DH
course may be unsuitable for holding DH races when there is insucient snow
depth, unfavorable surface snow conditions, dense fog, heavy snowfall, storm or
rain).
660 Gate Judge Instructions
121
661 Control of Passage (Explanation) - see diagram
661.1 Every gate judge must receive a check card along with weatherproof covering
where necessary, for each run that will show:
• name of the gate judge
• number(s) of the gate(s) for which he is responsible and
• designation of the run (1st or 2nd)
661.2 If a competitor fails to pass through a gate (or gate marker) correctly according to
art. 661.4 the gate judge must immediately record the competitor’s bib number and
the gate number(s) where the fault occurred.
661.2.1 A drawing of the fault committed is essential.
Fig A Giant Slalom/Super G/Downhill
Fig B Parallel
Fig C Slalom
1. Turning Pole
2. Turning Gate
3. Outside Pole
4. Outside Gate
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
122
661.3 Should a competitor receive outside help, for instance after a fall, the Gate Judge
must record this on his check card (628.1.3).
661.4 Correct Passage
U661.4.1 A gate has been passed correctly when both the competitors’ ski tips and both feet
have passed across the gate line. If a competitor loses a ski without committing a
fault, e.g., not by straddling a SL pole, then the tip of the remaining ski and both
feet must have passed the gate line. This rule also applies when a competitor has to
climb back up to a gate.
661.4.1.1 The gate line in DH, GS and SG, where a gate consists of two pairs of poles holding
gate panels between them, is the shortest imaginary line between the turning pole
and outside gate at snow level (661, g. A).
661.4.1.2 The gate line in SL is the imaginary shortest line between the turning pole and the
outside pole.
661.4.1.3 If a competitor removes a pole from its vertical position before both the competitor’s
ski tips and both feet have passed the gate line, the ski tips and feet must still pass
the original gate line (marks in the snow). This is also valid in the case of a missing
turning pole (or gate).
661.4.2 In Parallel SL, the passage is correct when both ski tips and both feet have passed
outside the gate marker in the direction of the turn (661, g B).
662 Importance of the Task of the Gate Judge
662.1 Each gate judge should have a thorough knowledge of the competition rules. The
gate judge is required to follow instructions from the Jury.
662.2 The decision handed down by the gate judge must be clear and unbiased. The
gate judge must declare a fault only when he is convinced that a fault has been
committed.
662.3 The gate judge can consult the adjacent gate judge in order to conrm his opinion.
He can even demand via a member of the Jury that the race be briey interrupted,
so that a check can be made of the tracks on the course.
662.4 When an adjacent gate judge, a member of the Jury, or an ocial video controller
makes a report concerning a competitor which diers from the notes of the gate
judge in question, the Jury may freely interpret these notes in view of a possible
disqualication of a competitor or of a decision concerning a protest.
663 Giving Information to a Competitor
663.1 A competitor, in the case of an error or a fall, is permitted to ask the gate judge if a
fault was committed, and the gate judge, if asked, must inform a competitor if he
has committed a fault that would lead to disqualication.
U663.1.1 In either case with a clear, decisive voice, the gate judge answers the competitor’s
question or informs him with one of the following words:
• “Go!” if the competitor should expect no disqualication, since the gate judge has
ruled the gate passage as correct,
• “Back!” if the competitor may expect disqualication.
663.2 The competitor himself is fully responsible for his action and, he cannot hold the
gate judge responsible.
664 Immediate Announcement of Disqualifying Faults
664.1 The Jury may decide that the gate judge will signal a disqualifying fault immediately
by raising a ag of a particular color, by a sound signal, or by other means as
provided by the organizers (670 video control).
664.2 The gate judge must record all infringements on his check card regardless of
immediate announcements.
123
664.3 The gate judge is required to give information to the Jury members on request.
665 Duties of the Gate Judge on completion of the 1st and 2nd run
665.1 The chief gate judge (or his assistant) is required to collect all the check cards
immediately after each run and to pass them on to the Referee in the nish.
666 Duties of the Gate Judge at the Conclusion of the Race
666.1 Each gate judge who has recorded a disqualifying fault or who has been witness
to an incident leading to a re-run must be available to the Jury until after the
settlement of any protests.
666.2 It is the responsibility of the Technical Delegate to dismiss a gate judge who is
waiting to be called by the Jury.
667 Supplemental Duties of the Gate Judge
667.1 The gate judge may be asked to perform other duties after he performs his required
function, including the replacement of gate poles and torn or missing panels.
667.2 He should assist in keeping the course clear and removing any markings made on
the course by competitor or third parties.
667.3 A competitor who is obstructed during his run must stop immediately and report
this to the nearest gate judge. The gate judge must enter the details of the incident
on his check card and have the card available for the Jury at the end of the 1st or
2nd run. The competitor may apply to any member of the Jury for a re-run.
668 Location and Support of the Gate Judge
668.1 The gate judge must be so placed that he can properly observe the terrain, gates
and course sections which he is responsible. He should be near enough to be able
to take prompt action, but distant enough not to hinder the competitor.
668.2 Organizers are obliged to outt the gate judges so that they are readily identiable.
Identication or clothing should be of a color that will not be confused with a gate
panel.
668.3 The gate judge must be in their location well before the start of the run. Organizers
should provide gate judges with protective clothing against adverse weather where
necessary and should provide some form of nourishment during the run.
668.4 Any equipment necessary to permit the gate judge to perform his assigned duties
should be provided.
669 Number of Gate Judges
669.1 The organizer is responsible for having a sucient number of competent gate
judges available.
669.2 The organizer must inform the Jury of the number of gate judges available for the
training and particularly for the race.
U669.3 The Jury along with the support of the Organizing Committee may opt to not use
Gate Judges for DH, DH Training, SG, SG Training, and GS, provided they take
measures to cover the entire course with sucient Jury members, Jury advisors,
eyes of the Jury, and connection coaches
670 Video control
When the organizer has equipment for ocial video control, the Jury will appoint
an ocial video controller. The duties of the video controller are to observe the
competitors’ passage on the course.
680 Poles
All poles used in the alpine events are described as slalom poles and are either rigid
poles or ex poles.
680.1 Rigid Poles
Must be round, uniform poles with a diameter between a minimum of 20 mm and a
124
maximum of 32 mm without joints. They must be of such a length that when set, they
project about 1.80 m out of the snow and they must be made of a non-splintering
material (plastic, plasticized bamboo or material with similar properties).
680.2 Flex poles
Flex poles are tted with a spring-loaded hinge. They must conform to FIS
specications.
680.2.1 Use of Flex poles
Flex poles must be used for all alpine competitions except DH. The use of ex-
poles may be requested by the Jury for DH.
680.2.1.1 SL
The slalom poles must be colored red or blue. The turning pole must be a ex-pole.
680.2.1.2 GS and SG
In GS and SG two pairs of slalom poles are used, each pair carrying a gate panel.
The panels should be xed or tied so they should tear or break away from one pole.
The turning pole(s) must be ex-pole(s).
680.2.2 FIS Specications for Flex Poles
All further details in regard to construction and functioning of the ex poles are
regulated in the valid FIS Specications for ex poles.
690 Gate Panels for Giant Slalom, Super-G and Downhill
All sanctioned GS, SG and DH competitions (including masters competitions)
must use gate panels which conform to the current FIS specications. A list of
homologated panels is published on the FIS website. Articles 701.3.2, 901.2.2 and
1001.3.2 remain valid.
690.1 Release in case of collision
Gate panels should release from the pole when a competitor gets caught by it. The
gate panel must meet the test requirements for this as dened in the specications
for Gate Panel Homologation.
690.2 No removal during normal collision with the pole
During normal collisions, the gate panel should not release from the pole.
The gate panel must meet the test requirements for this dened in the specications
for Gate Panel Homologation.
690.3 Wind permeability
The panel must be made of wind-permeable material.
690.4 Advertising on Panels
Advertising on panels should not reduce wind permeability and the release
mechanism of the panels.
Section 3 Particular Rules for the dierent Events
700 Downhill (DH)
U700.1 For scored and non-scored competitions that include U16 and U14 athletes, refer
to art. U1253 and to the “Course Setting Specications Matrix” later in this chapter
for vertical drop, course setting and other information including specic exceptions
and modications to this section.
U700.2 Only athletes U14 and older can participate in DH competitions.
701 Technical Data
701.1 Vertical Drop
• 400 m - 500 m
• In U18 and older only competitions, maximum vertical drop may be expanded to
125
700 m.
701.2 Course Length
The course length has to be measured by a measuring tape, wheel or GPS and
printed on the start and the results list.
701.3 Gates
701.3.1 A DH gate consists of four slalom poles and two panels.
701.3.1.1 Courses are marked with red or blue gates (701.3.2).
701.3.1.2 If men and women use the same course, the additional gates for women must be
blue.
701.3.2 For gate panels rectangular cloth panels are to be used, approximately 0.75 m wide
by 0.5 m high. They are to be fastened on the poles, so that they can be recognized
as easily as possible by the competitors. In place of red a luminous orange color
may be used. In the event that the safety netting is the same color as the gate panels
(usually red or blue), where the gates cannot be seen properly against the backdrop
of the safety netting, an alternative color for the gate panels (usually blue or red)
may be used on those gates.
701.3.3 The width of the gates must be at least 8 m.
702 The Courses
702.1 Joint Regulations for DH Courses
702.2 General Characteristics of the Courses
A DH is characterized by the six components of technique, courage, speed, risk,
physical condition and judgment. It must be possible to ski the DH course from the
start to the nish with dierent speeds. The athlete adapts speed and performance
to his ski technical skills and to his individual self-responsible judgment.
702.3 Particular Regulations for the Course Layout
Courses should normally be approximately 30 m wide. The inspector assigned for
course homologation decides whether this width is sucient and if necessary, may
order widening. He can also permit a width of less than 30 m depending on the
line and terrain requirements, as long as the areas of the course before and after
the narrow part permit this. Fall zones should be planned, where necessary, on the
outside of curves. Possibilities to control speed should be made specically for the
approach to lips, drop os and jumps.
Not all parts of the course need necessarily to be skied at full speed.
Surfaces may be left in their natural state.
Obstacles against which competitors may be thrown by leaving the course should
be as well protected as possible with high safety nets, safety fences, pads or similar
means, if necessary, together with slip-sheets.
The function of safety installations must withstand weather conditions typical for
alpine skiing.
702.4 Means of Transport
Access to the start must be provided by lifts or shuttle service.
703 Course Setting
703.1 Setting of the Gates
703.1.1 Gates shall be set to delineate the desired racing line.
703.1.2 Before dicult jumps and dicult passages the speed should be controlled by
appropriate course setting where possible.
703.1.3 At places where the outside gate must be removed, in exceptional cases decided by
the Jury, the turning gate serves as a gate. (see art. 904.3)
126
703.2 Preparation and Inspection of the Course
703.2.1 For all DH competitions listed in the calendar, the race course should be completely
prepared and race-ready before the rst Jury inspection. It should be available with
all of the installations as set out in the technical advisor’s or homologation report,
or as agreed between the organizer and TD prior to the arrival of the teams.
703.2.2 Before the start of the training on the rst ocial training day, there must be an
inspection by the Jury with the technical advisor, if present and generally also in
the presence of the team captains or trainers.
703.2.3 Before the start of the rst ocial training the competitors shall conduct a complete
inspection of the course.
703.2.4 The members of the Jury shall be available at the nish to receive requests and
suggestions regarding the course, training, etc. from the competitors and trainers.
704 Ocial Training
704.1 Obligation to Participate
The ocial training forms an integral part of the competition. The competitors are
required to participate in the training.
All qualied competitors entered for the competition must have been entered and
drawn in all ocial training runs. This is also valid where substitutes are authorized
by special rules.
704.2 Duration
Three days should be scheduled for the inspection and ocial training.
704.2.1 A reduction in the number of training days, or at least one training run, may be
decided on by the Jury.
704.2.2 The ocial training need not necessarily be on consecutive days.
704.3 Race-ready Preparation
The entire facilities (start, course, and nish area) must be completely prepared as
for racing by the rst ocial training day.
704.3.1 All crowd control barriers must be completed.
704.4 First Aid and Medical Service
The rst aid and medical services must be completely operational during all
training times.
704.6 Training Numbers
Competitors must wear training numbers (bibs) for all ocial training.
704.7 Starting Order
The Start Referee, or an ocial appointed by the Jury, must verify from a start list
that the competitors start training in the order of the training start list, and that start
intervals are maintained.
704.8 Timed Training
704.8.1 During at least one of the last two training days the times must be taken.
704.8.2 Recorded times must be given to the team captains at latest at the team captains
meeting but may also be announced over the loud speaker or published on the
scoreboard after each competitors run.
704.8.3 A competitor must participate in at least one timed training run.
704.8.4 In case of a fall, or stopping, or being overtaken during a training run, the competitor
must leave the race line. Continuing on the DH training run is not permitted. He
may, however, move along the edge of the course to the nish.
704.8.5 In case of atmospheric changes (snowfall etc.) between the last training day and the
day of the race, an inspection of the course may be organized for the competitors
127
on the day of the race.
704.8.6 Whenever possible, one training should take place at the same time as that
scheduled for the race.
705 Yellow Flag
705.1 Inspection
The Jury may dene the position of the yellow ags for the training and for
the race if required which can be waved to alert the next competitor. The ags
must be positioned before the rst inspection and should be recognizable by the
competitors.
705.2 Training
When a competitor is stopped in training by the yellow ag, he has the right to
restart from the point where he has been stopped.
At the request of the competitor, a Jury member may allow him a re-run if this is
possible from the point of view of the organization and any delay resulting there
from. If a re-run is approved it is the responsibility of the competitor to present
himself to the Start Referee before the last competitor has started, otherwise this
approval will be withdrawn.
705.3 Race
When a competitor is stopped during the race, he has the right to a re-run provided
that the Jury considers this possible from an organizational point of view. The Jury
should ensure that the competitor’s re-run takes place before the last competitor on
the start list of the race.
U705.3.1 In case of being stopped, a fall, or being overtaken (in either a race or a training
run), the competitor must leave the race course. Continuing on the course is not
permitted. The competitor should move along the edge of the course to the rst
available exit.
705.4 Obligation
When a competitor is waved down by a yellow ag he must stop immediately.
705.5 Commands
On the command “start stop!” or “start stop, yellow ag” the Start Referee must
close the start. He must respond immediately via radio conrming that the start is
closed, and state the start number of the last competitor to have started as well of
the start number of the competitor held at the start (“start stop conrmed, number
23 on course, number 24 at the start”).
The Jury member who called the “start stop” is also responsible for requesting
yellow ag(s) that are necessary to stop competitor(s) on course.
706 Execution of the Downhill
706.1 Downhill in One Run
A DH will be carried out in one run.
706.2 Downhill in Two Runs
706.2.1 A DH in two runs can be organized.
U706.2.1.1 The combined time of the two runs must be a minimum of 60 seconds.
706.2.2 The result will be determined by the addition of the two run times.
The rule “Starting order for the 2nd run” (621.11) will be used.
706.2.3 All the rules for the DH are valid for the race in two runs. The Jury will rule in case
of problems caused by the course, the training and the two runs.
706.2.4 The two runs should be run on the same day.
U706.2.6 In instances where the vertical drop requirements cannot be met, but the total
128
time is sucient for scoring, the TD must indicate in the report and on the race
transmittal sheet that the race should be scored despite the vertical drop deciency.
U707 Helmets
All competitors and forerunners must wear a helmet for ocial training as well as
for the race that meets the Equipment Specications. See information later in the
chapter under “Additional Regulations - Helmets”.
Soft ear protection is only permitted for helmets used in SL.
The helmets shall have no spoilers, nor protruding parts.
800 Slalom (SL)
U800.1 For scored and non-scored competitions that include U16 and younger athletes,
refer to art. U1254 and to the “Course Setting Specications” later in this chapter
for vertical drop, course setting and other information including specic exceptions
and modications to this section.
801 Technical Data
801.1 Vertical Drop
• 100-160 m
• In U18 and older only competitions, maximum vertical drop may be expanded to
200 m
U801.1 If the topography of a region does not permit a SL with the required vertical drop, a
shorter course may be used. The combined time of the two runs must be a minimum
of 50 seconds.
U801.2 In instances where the vertical drop requirements cannot be met, but the total
time is sucient for scoring, the TD must indicate in the report and on the race
transmittal sheet that the race should be scored despite the vertical drop deciency.
U801.3 Events may be conducted on parallel courses. For this course, specications for
Parallel events should be used. ACR 1222. All other rules for SL apply.
801.2 Gates
801.2.1 A slalom gate consists of two poles (art. 680) or where there is no outside pole the
gate will consist of a turning pole.
801.2.2 Consecutive gates must alternate in blue and red.
U801.2.3 A gate must have a minimum width of 4 m and a maximum of 6 m.
The distance from turning pole to turning pole of successive gates must not be less
than 7 m and not more than 11 m.
The distance between gate combinations (hairpin or vertical) must not be less than
0.75 m and not more than 1 m. The gates in hairpin or vertical combinations must
be set in a straight line. Delayed gates must have a minimum distance of 12 m
and a maximum distance of 15 m from turning pole to turning pole. The distance
between the gates within a delayed combination must be not less than 0.75 m from
either turning pole.
802 The Courses
802.1 General Characteristics of the Course
802.1.1 The course must be set on slopes with a gradient of approximately 33% to 45%. It
may even be below approximately 33%, but may exceed approximately 52% only
in very short parts of the course.
802.1.2 The ideal SL course, taking into consideration the drop and the gradient specied
above, must include a series of turns designed to allow the competitors to combine
speed with neat execution and precision of turns.
802.1.3 The SL should permit the rapid completion of all turns. The course should not require
129
A: Open Gate
B: Delayed Gate
C: Vertical Gate
D: Turning Pole
Vertical
Combination
Delayed Gate
12 - 15 m
min-max
measuring
turning pole D to
turning pole D
through delay B
7 - 11 m
min-max
measuring
turning pole D to
turning pole D
0.75 - 1 m
A
D
A
D
D
D
D
A
A
D
B
C
4 - 6 m
min-max
gate width
7 - 11 m
min-max
measuring
turning pole D to
turning pole D
D
For non-scored secifications see U1250-U1254
130
acrobatics incompatible with normal ski technique. It should be a technically clever
composition of gures suited to the terrain, linked by single and multiple gates,
allowing a uent run, but testing the widest variety of ski technique, including
changes of direction with very dierent radii. Gates should never be set only down
the fall line, but so that some full turns are required, interspersed with traverses.
802.1.4 Preparation of the Course
SL competitions must be raced on a course surface that is as hard as possible. If
snow falls during the race, the Chief of Course must ensure that it is packed or, if
possible, removed from the course.
802.2 Width
The course should normally be approximately 40 m wide, if two runs are set on the
same slope.
803 Course Setting
803.1 Course Setters
803.1.1 Pre-inspection
This inspection must be carried out by the course setter before he sets the course.
The SL should correspond to the average ability of the rst 30 competitors.
803.2 Number of Gates and Combinations of Gates
A SL must contain horizontal (open) and vertical (closed) gates as well as a
minimum of one and a maximum of three vertical combinations consisting of
three to four gates and at least three hairpin-combinations. It must also contain a
minimum of one and a maximum of three delay combinations.
803.3 Gates and Combinations of Gates - see image next page
The most important types of gates and combinations of gates are: horizontal (open)
gates, vertical (closed) gates, vertical combinations, hairpin-combinations and
delay gate combinations.
803.4 Setting
In setting a SL the following principles should be observed:
803.4.1 Avoidance of monotonous series of standardized combinations of gates.
803.4.2 Gates, which impose on competitors too sudden sharp braking, should be avoided,
as they spoil the uency of the run without increasing the diculties a modern SL
should have.
803.4.3 It is advisable before dicult combinations of gates to set at least one gate that
allows the competitor to ski through the dicult combination under control.
803.4.4 It is not advisable to set dicult gate passages either right at the beginning or end
of the course. The last gates should be rather fast, so that the competitor passes the
nish at a good speed.
803.4.5 Where possible, the last gate should not be too close to the nish. It should
direct competitors toward the middle part of the nish. If the width of the slope
necessitates it, the last gate can be common to both courses, provided the prescribed
alternation of blue and red gates is maintained.
803.4.6 The slalom poles should be xed (screwed) in by the Chief of Course or his
assistants immediately after they have been set, so that the course setter can
supervise the operation.
803.5 Checking the SL Course
The Jury must check that the course is ready for racing once the course setter has
set it, paying special attention that:
• the slalom poles are rmly xed (screwed) in.
• the gates are in the right color order.
131
• if necessary, the position of the poles is marked.
• the numbers are in the right order on the outside poles.
• the poles are high enough above the snow.
• the two SL courses are far enough from each other to avoid misleading the
competitors.
• the reserve poles are correctly placed not to mislead the competitors.
• start and nish are in accordance with art. 613 and 615.
804 Single Pole Slalom
All rules of the ACR are valid, except as follows:
804.1 Single pole SL is permitted in national competitions.
804.2 A single pole SL has no outside pole, except for the rst and the last gate, delay
gates and combinations (hairpin vertical).
U804.3 Where there is no outside pole, both feet and ski tips must have passed the turning
pole on the same side, following the normal race line of the SL crossing the
imaginary line from turning pole to turning pole. If a competitor loses a ski, without
committing a fault, e.g., not by straddling a pole, then the tip of the remaining ski
and both feet must meet both requirements. If the competitor has not correctly
passed the imaginary line from turning pole to turning pole and does not follow
the normal race line, then he has to climb back up and pass around the missed
turning pole. Where there is an outside pole (rst and last gate, delay gate and
combinations - hairpin, vertical) art. 661.4.1 is valid. (see also U629.4)
805 The Start
805.1 Start Intervals
The start takes place at irregular intervals in SL. The chief of timing and calculations
or his assistant tells the starter when each competitor should start, in agreement
with the Jury. The competitor on the course need not have passed the nish line
before the next competitor starts.
805.2 Starting Order
805.2.1 In the rst run in sequence of the start numbers.
805.2.2 For the second run see art. 621.11.
805.3 Start Signal
As soon as the starter has received the order for the next start, he gives the
competitor the warning “Ready” and a few seconds later the start signal “Go!”.
The competitor must start within about 10 seconds after this order.
805.3.1 A competitor must appear at latest one minute after being called by the ocial.
Early start times caused by the non-arrival of preceding competitors have to be
taken into account. The Start Referee may however, permit a delay that in his
opinion is due to “force majeure”. In doubtful cases he may allow the competitor a
provisional start, inserted in the normal starting order. The Start Referee will make
the necessary decisions.
805.4 Valid Start and False Start
Each competitor must start according to the art. 805.3, otherwise he will be
disqualied.
806 Execution of the Slalom
806.1 Two runs
A SL must always be decided by two runs on two dierent courses. Both courses
must be used one after the other in the order decided by the Jury. Division of
the competitors into two groups starting simultaneously on both courses is not
permitted. Whenever possible, both runs should be held on the same day.
132
U806.2 Limitations in the Second Run
Only in collegiate events may the Jury reduce the number of competitors in the
second run to half, provided that notice was given in the invitation or on the ocial
notice board before the race started, and at the team captains’ meeting before the
draw.
806.3 Video and Film Control
A video or lm control is recommended.
U807 Helmets
All competitors and forerunners must wear a helmet for ocial training as well as
for the race that meets the Equipment Specications. See information later in the
Art. 804 Single Pole Slalom
first gate
natural race line
delay gate combination
vertical combination
imaginary line
last gate
133
chapter under “Additional Regulations - Helmets”.
Soft ear protection is only permitted for helmets used in SL.
The helmets shall have no spoilers, nor protruding parts.
900 Giant Slalom (GS)
U900.1 For scored and non-scored competitions that include U16 and younger athletes,
refer to art. U1255 and to the “Course Setting Specications” later in this chapter
for vertical drop, course setting and other information including specic exceptions
and modications to this section.
901 Technical Data
901.1 Vertical Drop
• 200-350 m
• In U18 and older only competitions, maximum vertical drop may be expanded to
450 m for men and 400 m for women.
U901.1.1 If the topography of a region does not permit a GS with the required vertical
drop, a shorter course may be used. The combined time of the two runs must be a
minimum of 50 seconds.
U901.1.2 In instances where the vertical drop requirements cannot be met, but the total
time is sucient for scoring, the TD must indicate in the report and on the race
transmittal sheet that the race should be scored despite the vertical drop deciency.
U901.1.3 Events may be conducted on parallel courses. For this course, specications for
Parallel events should be used. ACR 1222. All other rules for GS apply.
901.2 The Gates
901.2.1 A GS gate consists of four slalom poles (art. 690) and two gate panels.
901.2.2 The gates must be alternately red and blue. The gate panels are to be approximately
75 cm wide and approximately 50 cm high. They are fastened between the poles so
that the lower edge of the panel is approximately 1 m above the snow and should
be capable of tearing or breaking away from the pole. (also art. 690)
901.2.3 The gates must be at least 4 m and at most 8 m wide. The distance between the
nearest poles of two successive gates must not be less than 10 m.
902 The Courses
902.1 General Characteristics of the Courses
The terrain should preferably be undulating and hilly. The course should normally
have a width of approximately 40 m.
The inspector authorized to homologate the course decides whether this width is
adequate and if necessary, can order it to be widened. He can also permit a width
of less than approximately 40 m depending on the line and terrain requirements, as
long as the areas of the course before and after the narrow part enable this.
902.2 Preparation of the Course
The course must be prepared as for the DH race. The parts of the course where
gates are set and where competitors have to turn must be prepared as for a SL.
903 Course Setting
903.1 Setting
In setting a GS the following principles should be observed:
903.1.1 Both runs can be set on the same course, but the second run must be re-set.
903.1.2 The skillful use of the ground when setting a GS is, in most cases, even more
important than for a SL, since combinations play a less important role owing
to the prescribed width of the gates and the greater distances between them. It
is therefore better to set mainly single gates, while exploiting the ground to the
134
utmost. Combinations can be set, but mainly on uninteresting terrain.
903.1.3 A GS consists of a variety of long, medium and short turns. The competitor should
be free to choose his own line between the gates. The full width of a hill should
be used wherever possible. At places where the outside gate must be removed, in
exceptional cases decided by the Jury, the turning gate serves as a gate.
904 Single Gate Giant Slalom
All rules of the ACR are valid, except as follows:
904.1 Single gate GS is permitted.
904.2 A single gate GS has no outside gate, except for the rst and the last gate and delay
gates.
904.3 Where there is no outside gate, both feet and ski tips must have passed the turning
pole of the turning gate on the same side, following the normal race line of the
GS crossing the imaginary line from turning pole to turning pole. If a competitor
loses a ski, without committing a fault, e.g., not by straddling a pole, then the tip
of the remaining ski and both feet must meet both requirements. Where there is
an outside gate (rst and last gate, delayed gate) art. 661.4.1 is valid. (see also
U629.4)
904.4 All rules and regulations dealing with the width of the course should be considered,
as if there is an imaginary outside gate.
905 The Start
905.1 In the rst run according to the start numbers (art. 621.3 and 622).
905.2 Starting order for the second run see art. 621.11.
906 Execution of the Giant Slalom
906.1 A GS must always be decided by two runs. The second run may be held on the
same course, but the gates must be reset. Whenever possible, both runs should be
held on the same day.
U906.2 Limitations in the Second Run
Only in collegiate events may the Jury reduce the number of competitors in the
second run to half, provided that notice is given in the invitation or on the ocial
notice board before the race started, and at the team captains’ meeting before the
draw.
906.3 Video Control
Article 806.3 is applied - if possible - also for GS.
U907 Helmets
All competitors and forerunners must wear a helmet for ocial training as well as
for the race that meets the Equipment Specications. See information later in the
chapter under “Additional Regulations - Helmets”.
Soft ear protection is only permitted for helmets used in SL.
The helmets shall have no spoilers, nor protruding parts.
1000 Super G (SG)
U1000.1 For scored and non-scored competitions that include U16 and younger athletes,
refer to art. U1256 and to the “Course Setting Specications” later in this chapter
for vertical drop, course setting and other information including specic exceptions
and modications to this section.
U1000.2 Only athletes U12 and older can participate in SG competitions.
1001 Technical Data
1001.1 Vertical Drop
• 300-450 m
135
• In U18 and older only competitions, maximum vertical drop may be expanded to
600 m
U1001.1 If the topography of a region does not permit a SG with the required vertical drop, a
shorter course may be used. The time of the run must be a minimum of 40 seconds.
1001.2 Length of the Course
The length of the course must be measured with either a measuring tape, wheel or
GPS and has to be published on the start list and the results.
1001.3 Gates
1001.3.1 A SG gate consists of four slalom poles (art. 680.2.1.2) and two gate panels.
1001.3.2 The gates must be alternately red and blue. In special circumstances, where a panel
color cannot be seen properly against the backdrop (e.g. safety netting), the Jury
can decide on an alternative color for the gate panel for that specic gate to improve
visibility. The gate panels are to be approximately 75 cm wide and approximately
50 cm high. They are fastened between the poles so that the lower edge of the panel
is approximately 1 m above the snow and should be capable of tearing or breaking
away.
1001.3.3 The gates must be at least 6 m and at most 8 m wide for open gates and at least 8 m
and at most 12 m for vertical gates. The gate panels are fastened in such a way so
they should tear or break away. (also art. 690)
U1001.3.4 The distance between the turning poles of two successive gates must be at least
25 m (exception: 1003.1.1).
Exception U16 and younger competitions (see Course Setting Specications).
1002 The Courses
1002.1 General Characteristics of the Courses
The terrain should be undulating and hilly if possible. The course should normally
have a width of approximately 30 m.
The inspector authorized to homologate the course decides whether this width is
adequate and if necessary, can order it to be widened. He can also permit a width
of less than approximately 30 m depending on the line and terrain requirements, as
long as the areas of the course before and after the narrow part enable this.
1002.2 Preparation of the Course
The course must be prepared like a DH course. The course sections on which there
are gates and where the competitors alter their directions must be prepared like in SL.
1002.3 Free-skiing on the Competition Hill
The competitor should be given the opportunity to free ski on the closed competition
hill before the course is set if possible.
1003 Course Setting
1003.1 Setting
In setting a SG the following principles should be observed:
1003.1.1 It is recommended to set the gates to make the best use of the terrain. Gate
combinations according to art. 803.3 are allowed only in small numbers. The
distance between the successive turning poles can in this case be less than 25 m,
but must be at least 15 m.
1003.1.2 A SG should contain a variety of long and medium turns. The competitor should be
absolutely free to choose his own line between the gates. It is not permitted to set
only down the fall-line of the slope.
1003.1.2.1 At places where the outside gate must be removed, in exceptional cases decided
by the Jury, the turning gate serves as a gate.
1003.1.3 Where the terrain allows it, jumps may be set.
136
1003.1.4 Youth SG should be carried out in a form of varied run. The basic form should
consist of jumps and gliding elements. The choice of course and course setting
has to follow the speed and the athletes’ level of skill. The athletes should learn
controlled speed and gliding.
U1003.2 Ocial Training
U1003.2.1 Courses that involve jumps should be preceded by at least one run on a training
course set on the course used for the actual competition. The training course should
be similar to the intended race course.
U1003.2.2 The Jury may waive this training requirement if conditions warrant; for example, if
there is a DH immediately preceding on the same course in which all competitors
participate.
1005 Start
Starting order and start intervals according to art. 621.3 and 622.
1006 Execution of the Super G
A SG will be carried out in one run.
U1007 Helmets
All competitors and forerunners must wear a helmet for ocial training as well as
for the race that meets the Equipment Specications. See information later in the
chapter under “Additional Regulations - Helmets”.
Soft ear protection is only permitted for helmets used in SL.
The helmets shall have no spoilers, nor protruding parts.
1008 Yellow Zones
Article 705 also applies.
1100 Combined
1100.1 Common Rules
Based on arts. 201.6.2 and 201.6.9 Alpine Combined competitions may be held
according to the technical regulations of the events and special regulations
approved by FIS.
U1100.2 Combined competitions may be held at all levels. When special rules apply, these
rules are considered an integral part of the ACR.
1100.3 The following possibilities of Combined events are possible:
• Alpine Combined (AC)
• Classical Combined (K)
1100.4 Combined competitions may be held as Single or Team events.
1100.5 Starting numbers given to the competitors for the rst run remain the same for all
runs.
1100.6 The results of a Combined competition are only counted if the competitor takes
part in each event of the Combined and appears in the intermediate results.
1100.7 The Combined results are calculated by adding the race times of the single events
or runs. Special forms of Combined events (art. 1103) can be calculated according
to other regulations.
1100.8 The Organizing Committee must state in the invitation how many competitors are
qualied for the second and any subsequent runs. The Jury may change this number.
1100.9 The start order is determined for each event according to art. 621.
1100.10 Only interim results may be published for those events or runs already completed.
The ocial results are only published when all events or runs have been completed.
1100.11 The sequence of the dierent races to be combined may be decided by the
137
Organizers and must be announced in the race notice and the program. Changes
may be made by the Jury.
1101 Alpine Combined (AC)
1101.1 Is the result of a DH or SG run and a single SL run held according to the technical
regulations for SL and those for DH or SG. The AC event consists of two runs.
1101.2 DH and SG events of AC must be held on courses specically homologated or
registered for DH or SG respectively. The SL may be held on these courses.
1101.3 If possible both runs should be held on one day (exceptions can only be decided by
the Jury).
1102 Classical Combined (K)
1102.1 Is the result of a DH and a SL. Each event is to be considered separately.
Section 4 Special Rules
U1200 Competitions under Articial Light
U1200.1 The running of competitions under articial lights is permitted.
U1200.2 The lighting must meet the following specications.
U1200.2.1 Courses must meet the lightning standards referenced by the National Ski Areas
Association: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, RP-6-01 –
Sports and Recreational Area Lighting, 6.24 Skiing. Lighting should be as uniform
as possible so that excessively bright and dark areas may be avoided.
U1200.2.1.1 On request of the TD or other Jury member, the organizer shall provide an
adavit attesting that the lighting on the homologated/registered trail to be used
meets or exceeds the lighting standard referenced in U1200.2.1.
U1200.2.2 The lights must be placed so that the light does not alter the topography of the
course. The light must show the competitor the exact picture of the terrain and must
not alter the depth perception and precision.
U1200.2.3 The lights should not cast the competitor’s shadow into the racing line and should
not blind the competitor by glare.
U1200.3 The TD together with the Jury must check ahead of time that the lighting conforms
to the rules.
U1200.4 The TD must submit a supplementary report on the quality of the lighting.
U1210 Team Competitions
U1210.1 The staging of team competitions is permitted.
U1220 Parallel (P)
U1221 Denition
The Parallel is a competition where two competitors race simultaneously side by
side down two courses. The setting of the courses, the conguration of the ground
and the preparation of the snow are to be as equal as possible. The competition
may be conducted where all competitors ski one run on each course, or additionally
competitors may then qualify for and compete in bracketed heats.
U1222 Technical Data
The vertical drop of the course should be between 50 and 100 m.
The current course setting matrix for distance between turning poles will be
followed with no requirement for combinations.
U1222.1 Jumps
Jumps are permitted
Recommendation:
138
• for U18 and older: up to 2 jumps
• for U16 and younger: up to 1 jump
U1222.2 If the topography of a region does not permit a Parallel with the required vertical
drop, a shorter course may be used. The combined time of the two runs must be a
minimum of 40 seconds.
1223 Choice and Preparation of the Course
U1223.1 The chosen slope shall be wide enough to permit two courses, (permitting a view of
the whole course from any point) with a minimum of 10 m between the courses and
appropriate separation from protection installations. The terrain variations should
be the same across the surface of the slope. The course layouts should have a
similar prole.
1223.2 Over the full width of the competition course, the snow should be consistently
hard, similar to course preparation for SL, so that it is possible to oer similar race
conditions on both courses.
1223.3 The Organizer must provide transport for the athletes back to the Start in the
shortest time possible.
1223.4 The competition course must be entirely closed o. It is recommended to fence o
reserved places intended for coaches, competitors and servicemen.
1224 The Courses
1224.1 Each course is designated by a series of gates; each gate is composed of two slalom
poles with a GS gate panel stretched between them and fastened in such a way so
as to tear or break away (see also art. 690). Poles of panels are red for the course on
skier’s left and blue for the course on skier’s right. The bottom of the panel must be
approx. 1 m above the snow. Not valid for Parallel.
1224.2 The same course setter sets both courses and makes sure they are equal and parallel.
He must ensure that the courses ow is smooth and that there is variety in the turns
and that the courses have rhythm changes.
U1224.2.1 The course must follow the current U.S. Ski & Snowboard Alpine Course Setting
Specications for Parallel events.
1224.3 After the last gate, the separation between the two courses must be marked to direct
each competitor towards the middle part of their respective nish.
U1225 Distance between the Two Courses
A minimum horizontal distance of 10 m between the courses (from turning pole to
turning pole) is required. The distance between the center of the start gates or doors
should be the same as between the two courses.
1226 Start
U1226.1 Start Device - It is recommended to use two doors capable of simultaneous opening
and connected to the timing devices during the bracketed elimination rounds.
U1226.1.1 It is acceptable to use other start gates that do not ensure simultaneous release
provided that the timing system is set to measure net times on each course.
1226.2 The start signal can only be given after the Jury has given the competitors
permission to start.
U1226.3 Start Command Before the starter gives the start command, he must rst ensure
that the competitors are ready by asking “Red course ready? Blue course ready?
Attention!” and then either activates the starting signal which opens the start doors,
or commands “GO!” if using start wands.
1226.5 In the case that start devices designed for simultaneous starts are used, if one or
both start gates fail to open, the start must be repeated.
U1226.5.1 if the competitor goes through the gate before the start command or starts more
139
than 2 seconds after the “GO” command, the competitor will be disqualied and a
time penalty as determined by the Jury will be applied (see U1232.1 and U1232.2).
1227 Finish
1227.1 The nish areas should be symmetrical. The nish line must be parallel with the
line of the start doors.
1227.2 The nish line is split into two parts and marked. Each of these must be at least 8 m
wide.
1227.3 It is necessary to visually divide the nish to keep the competitors separated after
the nish line.
1228 Jury and Course Setter
U1228.1 The Jury is set up as follows:
• the Technical Delegate
• the Referee
• the Chief of Race
• Assistant Referee (if required for control of both courses) (see U601.2.5)
U1228.2 The course setter is appointed by the Jury of the competition (if not selected by
U.S. Ski & Snowboard National or Regional Oce). Before setting the parallel
course, the Course Setter must conduct an inspection and study the competition
course in the presence of the Jury.
1229 Timing
In Parallel it is possible to measure either the dierence in time (at Finish) or the
individual run times (Start to Finish). If run times are recorded, the dierence in
time has to be calculated from the run times (in 1/100th seconds). The Jury has to
announce at the Team Captains Meeting, which timing method will be used.
U1230 Execution of a Parallel on Two Courses
Each heat between two competitors consists of two runs, the two competitors
change courses for the second run.
1230.2 Formation into Heats
U1230.2.1 Qualication run(s) can be conducted to determine the formation of heats.
Heats may be determined by one qualication run or by the ranking from combined
net times of two runs. The start order of a single qualifying run can be determined
by the SL points order or alternate seeding methods. The order and format of the
qualication run(s) must be announced in the race notice and conrmed at the
Team Captains meeting. Changes must be communicated to the Team Captains not
less than one hour prior to the scheduled start of the run(s).
1230.2.2 In the round of 32, sixteen heats of competitors are formed according to the
brackets list (see article 1234).
U1230.2.1.2 Qualication with one run. All athletes of the same gender will take one run on
the same course to determine the formation of the heats.
U1230.2.1.3 It is possible to conduct the nal brackets with smaller or depending on Jury
decision, larger (i.e., 64+ competitors) bracketed rounds. In any case the same table
will be used with competitors paired accordingly (i.e., 1st and 16th etc.).
1230.2.3 Start order: following the order of the bracket list, from top to bottom. All heats
race in succession their rst run and then their second. For each pair the competitor,
who is listed rst or respectively on top of the pairing, will start on the red course
for his rst run. For the second run the competitors change courses. The following
rounds follow the Bracket list from top to bottom.
1230.2.4 The Jury decides the method of inspection.
1230.2.5 The losing 16 competitors are ranked according to the total time of their run and
140
rerun of the round of 32, followed by competitors without a total time ranked
according to time from the Qualication run. (17th- 32nd).
U1230.2.6 Competitors having a bye may start.
1230.3 Round of sixteen
1230.3.1 The sixteen qualied competitors start following the Bracket list in heats from top
to bottom.
1230.3.2 There are eight that qualify for the quarter-nals
U1230.3.3 If using net times, the losing eight competitors are ranked according to their total
time and rerun of the round of 16, followed by competitors without a total time,
ranked according to time from the Qualication run. (9th - 16th).
1230.4 Quarter-nals
1230.4.1 The eight qualied competitors start following the Bracket list in heats from top to
bottom.
U1230.4.2 If using net times, the losing four competitors are ranked according to the total time
of their run and rerun of the Quarter-nals, followed by competitors without a total
time ranked according to time from the Qualication run. (5th - 8th).
1230.5 Semi-nals and Final
1230.5.1 The four qualied competitors start according to the Bracket list in heats from top
to bottom.
1230.5.2 The losers of the semi-nals race their rst run before the nalists race their rst
run, then the semi-nalists race their second run and then the nalists race their
nal run.
U1231 Control of the Runs
The gate judges are situated on both exterior sides of the courses. Each gate judge
is supplied with a ag which corresponds to the color of the course he is controlling
(either blue or red). This ag is to be used immediately to notify the Jury of a gate
fault in his/her section of the course. A Jury member located half way down the
course, judges whether a gate judge’s raising the red or blue ag was justied or
not and conrms the disqualication of the competitor.
1232 Disqualications / Did Not Finish
U1232.1 Reasons for disqualications are the following:
False start (art. U1226.5.1)
Changing from one course to another
Interfering with an opponent, accidentally or not
Not passing through a gate correctly (art. 661.4.2)
Stepping back (art. U614.2.3)
U1232.2 Penalty time - Only to be imposed in the bracketed elimination heats
The Penalty time may be 5% of the fastest single run qualication time with a
1.5 second maximum. The Jury may set the penalty time in other ways up to the
maximum of 1.5 seconds.
1232.3 The competitor who is disqualied rst or does not nish in the rst run of a heat
will start the second run with the penalty time. If both competitors are disqualied
or did not nish in the rst run the competitor who completed the most gates before
disqualication or did not nish is the winner of the rst run.
1232.4 If both competitors do not nish the second run, the result of the rst run counts.
If both competitors were tied, after the rst run, the winner of the second run or
the competitor who completed the most gates in the second run will advance to the
next round. If only one competitor is disqualied or does not nish in the second
run of a heat the competitor is eliminated. If both competitors are tied after the
141
second run the competitor who wins the second run advances to the next round.
U1232.5 In the case of a tie in both runs the competitor with the better bracket rank will
advance to the next round. If this happens in the Final and/or the Small Final,
competitors will be ranked equally (tie).
U1233 Parallel
In the case of issues or items not covered in art. 1220 - 1232 the Rules for Slalom
(art. 800) or Giant Slalom (art. 900)must be considered. Special Rules for Cups
may also be applied.
1234 Bracket diagram
1
(Red)
32
16
(Blue)
(Red)
17
9
(Blue)
(Red)
24
8
(Blue)
(Red)
25
(Blue)
5
(Red)
28
12
(Blue)
(Red)
21
13
(Blue)
(Red)
20
4
(Blue)
(Red)
29
(Blue)
3
(Red)
2
30
14
(Blue)
(Red)
19
11
(Blue)
(Red)
22
6
(Blue)
(Red)
27
(Blue)
7
(Red)
26
10
(Blue)
(Red)
23
15
(Blue)
(Red)
18
2
(Blue)
3
(Red)
4
31
(Blue)
Rouond of 16 Quarter Finals Semi Finals Finals Rank
Group
A
1
Group
B
Round of 32
142
U1250 Youth Competitions
U1251 General Regulations
U1252 Regulations for Organization
U1252.1 In the choice of courses, attention must be given that one is dealing with competitors
who are in their growing years during their physical development, and these factors
must be given appropriate importance.
U1252.2 The course setter in setting the course should take particular consideration of the
physical ability of the competitors.
U1252.3 For regulations related to ex poles, see the Flex Pole section later in this chapter.
U1253 U14 and Older Downhill (DH)
U1253.1 Only U14 and older athletes may take part in DH.
U1253.2 Vertical Drop and Course Setting
For vertical drop and course setting, see the Course Setting Specications later in
this chapter.
U1253.3 Except as specically modied, the rules for DH (700) also apply to non-scored
DH for U14s.
U1254 U16 and Younger Slalom (SL)
U1254.1 The course should have no special technical diculties. The SL is conducted in
one or two runs.
U1254.2 Vertical Drop and Course Setting
For vertical drop and course setting, see the Course Setting Specications later in
this chapter.
U1254.3 When using ex poles, protective clothing is recommended.
U1254.4 Except as specically modied, the rules for SL (800) also apply to non-scored SL
for U16s and younger.
U1255 U16 and younger Giant Slalom (GS)
U1255.1 GS for youth may be conducted in one or two runs.
U1255.2 Vertical Drop and Course Setting
For vertical drop and course setting, see the Course Setting Specications later in
this chapter.
U1255.3 Except as specically modied, the rules for GS (900) also apply to GS for U16
and younger.
U1256 U12 and Older Super G (SG)
U1256.1 Only U12 and older athletes may take part in SG.
U1256.2 Vertical Drop and Course Setting
For vertical drop and course setting, see the Course Setting Specications later in
this chapter.
U1256.3 For SG, based upon hill topography and eld ability, the Jury may increase the
gates to a maximum of 14% of vertical drop (counting only those requiring change
of direction).
U1256.4 Ocial training for U12 and U14 SG must include at least one SG training run
prior to the rst competition. Ocial training for U12 and U14 SG events is an
integral part of the competition and all athletes are required to participate. In
exceptional cases, a Jury decision can authorize a controlled free-ski run in lieu
of an ocial training run. The Jury decision can only be made after a discussion
with all representatives at the Team Captains Meeting and must be documented in
the Jury minutes If racing with U16 athletes, U1256.4 applies: U14 and younger
athletes must be provided a training run as provisioned in this rule.
143
U1256.5 Except as specically modied, the rules for SG (1000) also apply to non-scored
U12 and older SG.
U1257 Starting Order
U1257.1 Regional and divisional associations may use the procedures of art. 621 or they
may adopt special rules for determining the start order for the rst run in these
competitions.
U1258 Starting Order for the 2nd Run
In the second run, the thirty best nishers of the rst run start in reverse order,
the remaining competitors in the order of their rst run placing. Article 621.11.3
applies.
U1258.1 Regional and divisional associations may adopt special rules for determining the
start order of the second run in lieu of 1258.
U1259 Kombi
The Kombi consists of a mixture of standard turns and gates. The event meets
developmental needs for this age group, creating a tactical awareness by blending
sections of dierent gates in a owing, rhythmical, constantly changing pattern.
Results may be determined by combined times of each run, or each run may be
classied separately. The Jury must indicate the method in advance.
U1259.1 Course Setting
U1259.1.1 The racer’s speed must be controlled when transitioning from one section to a
dierent section and the course setting should allow skiers a smooth transition
from jumps or waves back into the course.
U1259.1.2 Common course characteristics and recommendations
• the course should test the skier’s ability to react and adapt to an ever-changing
rhythm and radius, but allow the competitors smooth transition between the various
sections of gates.
• building terrain is optional but not necessary as the course itself should apply
enough demand. Use creativity with available terrain.
• include a minimum of one jump.
• avoid gates that cause sudden braking and deceleration.
• use the entire slope and natural terrain and skiing across the fall line as often as
possible.
• the rst and last gates should lead the skier comfortably.
• forerunners or course testers should be available for course setting.
U1259.1.3 Gates
• gates may consist of one or two poles. If outside gate is used, it must be the same
type as turning gate (stubbie gate with stubbie gate, SL gate with SL gate, GS panel
with GS panel).
• consecutive gates must alternate in red and blue.
U1259.2 Kombi Design
There can be two dierent forms of the Kombi:
• SL/GS format (technical orientation) - setting with stubbies, SL gates and GS
gates or colored ground indicators, and
• GS/SG format (speed orientation) - setting with GS and SG gates or colored
ground indicators.
The selected race style must be announced on the race notice prior to the race and
again at the rst team captains meeting.
U1259.3 SL/GS Kombi: Technical Data
144
U1259.3.1 Vertical Drop and Course Setting
For vertical drop and course settings, see the Course Setting Specication later in
this chapter.
U1259.3.2 Course characteristics and recommendations:
• there are no minimum or maximum number of turns required.
• recommended to have a minimum of ve dierent sections.
• it is recommended to use only a single pole for vertical combinations.
• there should be at least one section of stubby gates.
U1259.4 GS/SG Kombi: Technical Data
U1259.4.1 Vertical Drop and Course Setting
For vertical drop and course settings, see the Course Setting Specication later in
this chapter.
U1259.4.2 Course characteristics and recommendations:
• recommended to have 3-5 dierent sections.
U1259.5 Kombi Inspection
A normal one run inspection, with a set inspection time is suggested. The concept
is to test reaction and adaptability from a standard amount of inspection time.
U1259.6 Number of runs
The Jury should decide on the number of runs by the rst team captains meeting.
U1259.7 Rules
U1259.7.1 With the exception of specic rules applying to course setting, Sla-lom/Giant
Slalom Kombi events are governed by Giant Slalom rules; e.g., Start commands
and start intervals; helmets for Kombi for U16s and younger.
U1259.7.2 With the exception of specic rules applying to course setting Giant Slalom/Super
G Kombi events are governed by Super G rules for Kombi for U16s and younger.
U1259.8 Starting order
See U1257.
U1259.9 Starting procedures
• See U613.4 - Start Signals
• See 622.2.3 - Start Intervals
U1259.10 In Kombi competitions, athletes must use the helmets designed for GS, SG, or DH.
Athletes U14 and older must use helmets that meet the new FIS standards.
U1260 National Race Points
U1260.1 The formula for the calculation of the race points permits the translation into points
of the time dierences between the winner and all other classied competitors.
U1260.2 The formula for the calculation of the race points is the following:
P = ((F x Tr) / Tw) - F or P = ((Tr / Tw) - 1) x F
P: Race points
F: A constant, dierent for each event, based on the CM according to the equation:
F = 60 / (CM - 1)
Tr: Time of the classied competitors in seconds
Tw: Time of the winner in seconds
U1260.3 The F values of the dierent events (DH, SL, GS, SG, AC) are published by U.S.
Ski & Snowboard for the season.
U1260.4 The race points are needed to establish the rankling for a race in connection with
the national points of the competitors, for determining the race penalty.
U1270 National Points
145
U1270.1.1 The national points of the competitors registered with U.S. Ski & Snowboard are
established according to the rules established by the Alpine Classication Working
Group.
U1270.2 The national points lists based on these rules form the basis for the division of
the competitors according to points. The corresponding commentary (Rules of the
Points) is part of these competition rules and will be renewed annually.
U1270.3 Use of the National Points
National points are used particularly for:
• establishing the quotas at competitions
• as a basis for the grouping and draw of the competitors at races and in training
• establishing the race penalty (in connection with the race points)
• establishing the penalties for injury status and for professional obligations etc.
• establishing the qualications for the existing competition categories.
ADDITIONAL REGULATIONS
FIS Registration
All athletes wishing to compete in FIS events must be inscribed to the FIS points list.
Registrations will be made on the list closing date (see calendar of important dates at the
beginning of this book) with FIS numbers available on the valid date.
Meet Financial Obligations
Competitors who have outstanding debts with U.S. Ski & Snowboard may be subject
to disciplinary sanction, including exclusion from competitions. Outstanding debts, as
established by law, to competition organizations, ski areas, food and lodging establishments,
retail shops, etc. may be considered as violations of the Code of Conduct as well as being
subject to civil and criminal actions.
Geographic Aliation/Designation
A racer shall aliate as an athlete of the region and division in which he/she is training
during the majority of the northern hemisphere competition season. The designation must
be made at the start of the season and must be abided by the racer for the entire season. Any
conicts must be resolved before participation; contact the regional oce.
Requests for in-season changes of aliation must be made in writing to the Alpine
Development Director. Such in-season changes may result in loss or default of regional and
divisional qualifying status.
Exception: U.S. Ski Team and National Training Group members retain their home
aliations.
Out of Region or Division Competition
Visiting regions each have a quota of 10 Women and 10 Men for U16 and older athletes.
Additional athletes must be considered under the Alpine Development Director quota of 10
Women and 10 Men.
U14 and younger athletes can only compete out of their home region with permission from
their coach, divisional manager, regional director, and the regional director of the region in
which they are wishing to race.
U14 and younger athletes can only compete out of their home division with permission
146
from their coach, divisional manager, and the divisional manager of the division in which they
are wishing to race.
Divisions may designate certain races as “Open”. These events are open to competitors
outside of the division, but from the home region, without the requirement for specic
permission.
Start Limitations
First year age eligible athletes (YOB 2007) are not allowed to participate in Southern
Hemisphere competitions, or Northern Hemisphere competitions until the North American
season starts.
U18 athletes can compete in international competitions up to a maximum limit in the tech
events (GS and SL) of 30 total starts for YOB 2007 and 35 total starts for YOB 2006. Tech
event starts at Olympic Winter Games, World Championships, World Cup, World Junior
Championships, Youth Olympic Games, U.S. Alpine Championships, and U18 Nationals are
exempt from this limitation. There is no limit to participation in the speed events of DH, SG,
and AC.
U16 and younger athletes are not allowed to begin racing until the second full weekend in
December.
U16 athletes (YOB 2008 and 2009): are recommended not to exceed 25 total starts in the
tech events of GS and SL.
Gate Panels
See section 690.
Flex Poles
• All USA FIS and national scored events must use FIS homologated ex poles.
• All poles on a course must be of uniform height and diameter.
• For national scored SL events, women should use FIS type B poles, and men can use FIS
type A or FIS type B poles (type B recommended).
• For U16 SL events, poles must be full length; women should use FIS type B poles and men
can use FIS type A or FIS type B poles (type B recommended).
• For U14s and younger SL events, poles must be FIS type B and be 60” in height o
the snow surface. This applies to events that are exclusive to U14 and younger; it is not
applicable to mixed age races which include athletes U14 and older. Stubby poles are
allowed for U14 and younger non-scored events.
• In GS, SG and DH, poles should be full height for all age groups and genders. U14s and
younger should use FIS type B poles.
Denition – FIS type B poles are 25-28.9 mm in diameter, and FIS type A poles are 29-32 mm
in diameter.
Cameras
Helmet and body mounted cameras are not allowed in sanctioned competitions.
Cameras which are integrated into a pair of goggles are allowed at FIS (FIS, FISU, NJR,
ENL), scored and non-scored (including masters) competitions. They are not allowed at
World Cup, Continental Cup (NorAm Cup) or National Championship competitions.
U.S. Ski & snowboard and/or FIS respectively, retain all commercial media exploitation
rights arising in connection with the Event; personal non-commercial use of images and video
is allowed.
147
Drones and Aerial Photography
Any use of aerial drones must comply with Federal, State and Local laws as well as Ski
Area regulations.
If a drone operator can show compliance with those regulations, at the discretion of the
Jury, a drone may be used as a point of view (POV) camera prior to forerunners. Drones may
not be used during the actual conduct of the competition.
U.S. Ski & Snowboard and/or FIS respectively, retain all commercial media exploitation
rights arising in connection with the event; personal non-commercial use of images and video
is allowed.
Homologated Timing Equipment
The current list of homologated timers, start gates, and photocells approved by FIS can be
found at s-ski.com.
Masters Specic Rules
To oer a schedule of events consistent across the nation, the masters have adopted a set of
rules for participation, conduct, and course setting. These rules are to be used to conduct all
sanctioned masters events. In general, Masters competition follows the rules set by FIS and
U.S. Ski & Snowboard for alpine skiing events as set forth in the Alpine Competition Guide
(ACR) and the FIS ICR. However, there are some rules and race procedures that are specic
to masters competitions which are published in the Masters Competition Guide. The rules
specic to masters have “M” rule numbers and follow the organization of the ACR.
Course Length Recommendations
The following are recommended course length targets measured by the winning time.
These would be used as a reference to determine the appropriateness of the venue and course
set for the given age. Factors taken into consideration include:
• Physiological factors - anaerobic system not well developed until post-puberty,
• Attention span - young athletes are less capable of remembering a course and of
concentrating on a task throughout a course,
• Psychological factors - short courses make for smaller time gaps between racers, more
racers feel they are in the mix,
• Maturation rates - longer courses may advantage early maturers. In age class competition,
this can be leveled. Early maturers should be able to compete against their older, biological
age peers, on longer courses based on the rules for older ages in designated competitions.
U10 U12 U14 U16
Downhill
X X 30 - 60 sec. 45 - 75 sec.
Slalom
25 - 35 sec. 30 - 40 sec. 35 - 45 sec. 40 - 50 sec.
GS
30 - 40 sec. 35 - 45 sec. 45 - 55 sec. 55 - 65 sec.
Super-G
X 35 - 45 sec. 40 - 60 sec. 45 - 70 sec.
Kombi
30 - 40 sec. 35 - 45 sec. 40 - 50 sec. 45 - 60 sec.
Parallel *
20 - 30 sec. 20 - 30 sec. 20 - 30 sec. 25 - 35 sec.
148
Course Setting Specications
U10 and younger U12 U14 U16 and Older
Distance between gates Max. 50 m As required
Vertical drop Max. 350 m
Max. 500 m
1
Direction changes As required As required
Distance between gates
Vertical drop Max. 100 m Max. 120 m Max. 160 m
Max. 160 m
1
Additional requirements
2-4 hairpins; 1-2 verticals (3-4 gates);
1-3 delays
3-6 hairpins; 1-3 verticals (3-4 gates);
1-3 delays
Distance between gates
Open 15-25 m; Delay min. 10 m between
successive gates and max. 35 m from
turning pole to turning pole
Open 15-27 m; Delay min. 10 m between
successive gates and max. 35 m from
turning pole to turning pole
Vertical drop Max. 200 m Max. 250 m Max. 350 m
Max. 350 m
1
Additional requirements
Distance between gates
Open 22-35 m; Delay min. 10 m between
successive gates and max. 45 m from
turning pole to turning pole
Open 25-40 m; Delay min. 15 m between
successive gates and max. 50 m from
turning pole to turning pole
Open 25-45 m; Delay min. 15 m between
successive gates and max. 55 m from
turning pole to turning pole
Vertical drop Max. 300 m Max. 350 m
Max. 450 m
1
Min. of 1 jump recommended Min. of 1 jump recommended
Training run recommended (U1003.2.1)
Distance between gates
Maximum vertical drop
Distance between gates SL 6-10 m, GS 12-20 m
Maximum vertical drop 150 m 180 m
** These specifications only apply to course setting; they do not apply to maximum vertical drop. Unless an athlete is competing with a “Ski Up Agreement”, they are not permitted to compete in events where the vertical
drop exceeds the allowance for their chronological age group. Example: GS field consists of U16, U14, U12, and U10 athletes, U12 course setting specification will apply, but the maximum vertical drop of 200 m for U10
athletes must be respected.
Variety of terrain suggested
Combination 4-6 m; Open 7-11 m; Delay 12-15 mCombination 4-6 m; Open 6-10 m; Delay 11-14 m
* Crossover between age categories for SL, GS, SG, Kombi and SkillsQuest is encouraged. Where multiple age classes are competing, course setting specifications will be based on the specifications for one class
older than the youngest class (for example, if a race has U10, U12 and U14 racers, it should use the U12 course setting specifications) except in DH where course setting specifications will be based on the youngest
class participating.
2
Distance between courses should be 8-12 m.
1
In U18 and Older only competition, maximum vertical drop may be expanded to DH: 700 m, SL: 200 m, GS: 400 m for women and 450 m for men, SG: 600 m
SL 6-10 m, GS 12-20 m
200 m
Kombi - SL/GS
U1259
3
U1256.4 – Official training for U12 and U14 SG must include at least one SG training run prior to the first competition. Official training for U12 and U14 SG events is an integral part of the competition and all athletes
are required to participate. In exception cases, a Jury decision can authorize a controlled free-ski run in lieu of an official training run. The Jury decision can only be made after a discussion with all representatives at the
Team Captains Meeting and must be documented in the Jury minutes. If racing with U16 athletes, U1256.4 applies: U14 and younger athletes must be provided a training run as provisioned in this rule.
2023-24 U.S. Ski & Snowboard Alpine Course Setting Specifications (Scored and Non-Scored)
10-20 m
2
100 m
Max. 2 hairpins; Max. 1 vertical combination (Max. 3 gates); Max. 1 delay
gate
Downhill (DH)
700 and U1253
XX
Slalom (SL)
800 and U1254
Giant Slalom (GS)
900 and U1255
Additional requirements
Super G (SG)
1000 and U1256
X
Parallel
Open 15-22 m; Delay min. 8 m between successive gates and
max. 30 m from turning pole to turning pole
Training run required (U1256.4)
3
Variety of terrain suggested
149
Competition Equipment Rules
NOTE: The Jury is empowered to prevent an athlete from starting if equipment is deemed
inappropriate for the event being contested.
There are no changes to these rules from the 2022-23 season.
U18 and Older Equipment
Description Event FIS National
Ski Length
Ski length measurement
tolerance +/- 1 cm
** -5 cm tolerance for FIS/ENL
competition
* -10 cm tolerance for Men U18
rst-year athletes
DH Women 210 cm min. ** 183 cm min.
DH Men 218 cm min. ** 183 cm min.
SG Women 205 cm min. ** 183 cm min.
SG Men 210 cm min. ** 183 cm min.
GS Women 188 cm min. ** No rule
GS Men 193 cm min. ** No rule
SL Women 155 cm min. 130 cm min.
SL Men 165 cm min. * 130 cm min.
Radius
DH Women & Men 50 m min. 30 m min.
SG Women 40 m min. 30 m min.
SG Men 45 m min. 30 m min.
GS Women & Men 30 m min. 17 m min.
SL Women & Men No rule No rule
Prole width
in front of Binding
DH Women & Men 95 mm max. No rule
SG Women & Men 95 mm max. No rule
GS Women & Men 103 mm max. No rule
SL Women & Men No rule No rule
Prole width
under Binding
DH Women & Men 65 mm max. No rule
SG Women & Men 65 mm max. No rule
GS Women & Men 65 mm max. No rule
SL Women & Men 63 mm min. No rule
Stand Height
(ski / plate / binding)
all events 50 mm max. 50 mm max.
Boot Height
(from sole to top of foot bed)
all events 43 mm max. 43 mm max.
150
U16 Equipment
Description Event FIS National
Ski Length
Ski length measurement
tolerance +/- 1 cm
DH Women & Men No rule 183 cm min.
SG Women & Men 183 cm min. 183 cm min.
GS Women & Men 188 cm max. No rule
SL Women & Men 130 cm min. 130 cm min.
Radius
DH Women & Men No rule 30 m min.
SG Women & Men 30 m min. 30 m min.
GS Women & Men 17 m min. 17 m min.
SL Women & Men No rule No rule
Prole width
under binding
SG Women & Men 65 mm max. No rule
GS Women & Men 65 mm max. No rule
Stand Height
(ski / plate / binding)
all events 50 mm max. 50 mm max.
Boot Height
(from sole to top of foot bed)
all events 43 mm max. 43 mm max.
U14 Equipment
Description Event FIS National
Ski Length
Ski length measurement
tolerance +/- 1 cm
DH Women & Men No rule No rule
SG Women & Men No rule No rule
GS Women & Men 188 cm max. No rule
SL Women & Men 130 cm min. 130 cm min.
Radius
DH Women & Men No rule 17 m min.
SG Women & Men No rule 17 m min.
GS Women & Men 17 m min. 17 m min.
SL Women & Men No rule No rule
Prole width
under binding
SG Women & Men 65 mm max. No rule
GS Women & Men 65 mm max. No rule
Stand Height
(ski / plate / binding)
all events 50 mm max. 50 mm max.
Boot Height
(from sole to top of foot bed)
all events 43 mm max. 43 mm max.
U12 and Younger Equipment
U12 and younger athletes should limit skis based upon the recommendations in the Alpine
Training System and the Course Setting matrix.
• U12 - two pairs (SL, GS), length ski/size appropriate. Only one pair of skis is allowed
within the race arena for inspection and competition.
• U10 - one pair (multi-event), length ski/size appropriate.
151
Masters Equipment
U.S. Ski & Snowboard Masters rules conform to the FIS Masters equipment rules.
Competitors in Masters events are recommended to compete on equipment designed for the
particular event (DH, SL, GS, SG); there are no recommendations in regards to ski length,
radius or prole width. Maximum stand height is 50 mm. Maximum boot height is 45 mm.
For FIS Masters Competitions, equipment rules in regard to ski length (except SG), radius
and prole width are recommendations. The minimum ski length for SG skis is compulsory
for MAS races. No length, width or ski radius restriction for women above 55 and men above
65 years of age. The FIS recommendations for ski length, ski radius and prole width can be
found in the current FIS Specications for Competition Equipment.
Ski Wax and Ski Preparation
U.S. Ski & Snowboard has prohibited wax products containing uorocarbons from use in
all sanctioned competitions.
U14 and Younger Competitions
• No wax benches are allowed in the race arena, which is dened as the areas between the
fences and including the start and nish areas.
• No waxing application is allowed in the competition venue, which is dened as the ski
resort property.
Helmets
Equipment is the responsibility of the athlete and in the case of a minor, their parents or
guardians. Equipment must be maintained and utilized in accordance with manufacturer’s
instruction.
In FIS competitions, international competition rules will apply.
Helmets designed and manufactured for the particular event of ski racing being contested
are required for all competitors and forerunners in all scored and non-scored events, and
ocial training. Helmets must bear a CE mark and conform to recognized and appropriate
standards such as CEH.Din 1077, ASTM F2040, SNELL S98 or RS 98.
Athletes U14 and older, including masters, must use helmets that meet the FIS standards
for all sanctioned GS, SG, DH, P, and K competitions.
In Kombi competitions, athletes must use the helmets designed for GS, SG, or DH.
Helmets must cover the head and ears. The helmets shall have no spoilers, nor protruding
parts. Protective features integral to the event being contested, such as chin guards on SL
helmets are permitted. Soft ear protection is only permitted for helmets used in SL (they are
not allowed in PSL).
Helmet mounted cameras, and the mount itself, are not allowed on helmets in ocial
training or competition.
U.S. Ski & Snowboard does not wish for ocials to disqualify, or deny entry or starts to
an athlete because the athlete has personalized his/her helmet with stickers, glitter, or other
non-protruding applications.
U.S. Ski & Snowboard does not specify nor recommend nor make any warranties as to
the tness for use of any particular ski helmet design or brand name. U.S. Ski & Snowboard
undertakes no responsibility, liability or duties to any competitor in connection with the
requirement that helmets be utilized. It is the sole responsibility of the competitor to select an
appropriate helmet for accident protection in ski racing.
Caution: Age and use aect the protective qualities of all safety helmets. Some older
helmets and any helmets that have been damaged either in a racing fall or from other impact
may no longer provide sucient protection – even if there are no visible indications of
damage.
152
Anyone with questions regarding their helmet should contact the manufacturer for any
specic guidelines regarding its safety or use.
Ski Brakes
Regardless of stand height within these limits, ski brakes which are functional with
the actual ski/plate/binding in use are required and are the responsibility of the respective
producers and the athletes. Ski brakes used by competitors in all events, including master’s
events, must be functional and comply with all related FIS requirements.
Ski Pole Baskets
Ski poles must have baskets - metal baskets are not allowed.
PARA COMPETITION RULES
Para alpine is governed by the FIS and does not have any specic rules in the ACR with
exception to the ability to compete in sanctioned U.S. Ski & Snowboard able-bodied races
found in the “Golden Rule”. Complete adaptive competition rules, including classes for
competitors and factors are available at s-ski.com/en/para-snowsports/para-alpine.
The “Golden Rule”
To encourage adaptive competitors to participation in sanctioned competitions, the Alpine
Sport Committee has adopted special seeding rules for adaptive competitors. The “Golden
Rule”, so called because Adaptive World Champion Diana Golden rst proposed it, authorizes
a special start order for adaptive competitors within the seed and draw as follows:
1st Run: Seeding in special groups with start order: 16-20... 36-40... 56-60..., etc. or by
national points, whichever is more favorable. Placement within groups by U.S. Paralympic
Alpine Team ranking among the adaptive competitors entered.
2nd Run: Seeding in the same special groups or by normal Bibbo order, whichever is
more favorable. Placement within groups according to rst run nish order among adaptive
competitors.
2nd Run Bibbo other than 15: In the case of a “ip-30” 2nd run, the special group starts in
the 31st position or in the position immediately following the rst run leader when the ip is
other than 30.
Adaptive athletes who are shown as DNS, DNF, DSQ, or NPS in the rst run can start
in the second run with their original bib immediately after the last qualied competitor has
competed his run. It is recommended they be run in bib order.
Adaptive athletes are allowed to compete using the equipment required by their disability.
Note: Entry requirements and eligibility criteria are based on published rules for all competitor members. In
addition, individual race organizers and the responsible regional and divisional association, may invite adaptive
competitors to sanctioned events for which these competitors otherwise might not be eligible.
Factor System
A factoring system was created for para-alpine skiing to allow the grouping of classications
into three general groups: sitting, standing and visually impaired. One medal event can then
be held for each group even though there is a wide range of functional mobility and medical
dierences. This system for comparing the various sport classes ‘on par’ applies to adaptive
competitions only. It is not applied to adaptive competitors participating in ‘able-bodied’ races.
Except for the specic application of the Golden Rule, adaptive competitors participating in
able-bodied races do so according to the rules, procedures and scoring of those races.
The factoring system works by having a number for each class based on their functional
mobility or vision levels, where the results are calculated by multiplying the nish time by
the factored number. The resulting number is the one used to determine the winner in events
where the factor system is used. This means the faster skier down a hill may not be the winner
153
of an event.
1st Run Time Adjustment 1st Run
Racer Class Real Time Factor Time
J. Doe L2 56.38 X .9175758 = 51.73
J. Doe L4 56.39 X .9820047 = 55.37
Second run start order is calculated using factored times with rst 15 racers reversed.
Factors are updated annually. Factoring is used in all Para World Championships, Para World
Cup, Paralympic, Para Continental Cup, and all Para FIS races. Factor sheets and other information
can be obtained from the FIS at s-ski.com/en/para-snowsports/para-alpine/documents.
COURSE APPROVALS
The purpose of the homologation and inspection is four-fold:
• the inspection indicates that the course involved meets FIS and/or U.S. Ski & Snowboard
standards as appropriate - when properly prepared and with ‘protection’ in place according
to the instructions of the inspector and, in some cases, a FIS technical advisor.
• the inspection conrms that the course meets the technical requirements as described in
the report.
• the report itself provides valuable data to the FIS and/or U.S. Ski & Snowboard and is
used to conrm that calendared races do, in fact, meet the required standards.
• nally, but certainly not least important, the inspection oers the opportunity for an expert
to make suggestions to the ski area operator and race organizer regarding the preparation
and use of the facility.
Information on the intended use of the trail, ski area/race organizer relations and current
stage of development will be requested to assure that homologation can be carried out in a
well-coordinated manner.
Schedule agreements are not to be executed in the absence of a FIS or U.S. Ski &
Snowboard homologation, or U.S. Ski & Snowboard registration, for that course and event,
subject to waiver for courses for which homologation applications have been submitted. An
application is not sucient to hold an event and without the nal homologation report a
scheduled event may not be held.
Homologation and registration is event specic: DH=DH, SG=SG, GS=GS, SL=SL.
For example, the setting of a SG course on many existing DH trails may require additional
technical and safety considerations. In some situations, it may not be possible to establish a
SG course on an existing DH trail that cannot be altered to t the technical requirements of
the SG (i.e. turning gates).
Application for Inspection and Approval
Ski areas and race organizers interested in pursuing homologation should review the
information at usskiandsnowboard.org, the requirements set forth in article 650 of the ACR,
and complete and submit the application and appropriate fees to Competition Services.
Once an application and payment has been received, that information will be given to the
Courses Working Group Chair, who will then assign an inspector to work with the ski area.
FIS Course Homologation
All requests for FIS course homologation or rehomologation shall be made by submitting
the ocial application form to Competition Services. A new homologation shall be submitted
to sta no later than Aug. 15 each year – and preferably prior to May 15. A re-homologation
shall be submitted to sta no later than Jan. 1 of the expiration year and preferably prior to
Dec. 1 of the preceding year of expiration. Completed reports should be submitted to the chair
by the inspectors by Sept. 30 each year.
154
All FIS races must be held on a FIS homologated trail, inspected and approved in advance
of calendaring by an inspector of the FIS Alpine Courses Subcommittee.
The homologation process for FIS trails involves assembling a report on the technical
aspects of the course prior to inspection by the FIS representative. (For new DHs a qualied
person from outside the U.S. must make the inspection.)
Following a satisfactory inspection and the creation of the nal report, the USA
representatives to the FIS Alpine Courses Subcommittee will transmit the completed report
and required documentation to the FIS. The approved le and validated homologation
certicate are returned by FIS and appear on the FIS and U.S. Ski & Snowboard websites.
U.S. Ski & Snowboard (National) Course Approval
All scored sanctioned alpine events must be conducted on U.S. Ski & Snowboard (or
FIS) homologated courses. ‘Protective’ measures and course setting must conform to the
inspection report and ACR requirements.
All scored events must be conducted on a homologated course and meet minimum vertical
drop requirements. (Exception: registered courses with penalty adjustments – additional and
minimum penalties).
Non-scored events must be conducted on a homologated course or on a registered course.
A registered course is one that does not meet the vertical drop requirements but does comply
with course setting and other regulations. Application, fee, inspection, and report are required
for the approval process for registered courses as well as for homologated courses.
All FIS-homologated trails are automatically accepted as meeting national course approval
standards specic to the event provided that reports are current.
Requests for new course homologation or registration shall be made by submitting the
application and fee to Competition Services sta no later than Sept. 15 each year – and
preferably prior to April 30. Requests for re-homologation/registration shall be made prior to
Jan. 1 of the expiration year and preferably prior to Dec. 1 of the preceding year of expiration.
Completed reports should be submitted to the chair by Oct. 31 each year.
Rehomologation and Course Approval Maintenance
All homologated DH and SG courses, FIS and national (both approved and registered)
must be re-inspected and re-homologated/re-approved/re-registered every ve years, or
sooner if major alterations are made in the course or related facilities, to assure that they meet
current standards, according to FIS and/or national competition regulations and as set forth in
the inspection report.
All homologated GS and SL courses, FIS and national (both homologated and registered)
must be re-inspected and re-homologated/re-approved/re-registered every ten years, or sooner
if major alterations are made in the course or related facilities, to assure that they meet current
standards, according to FIS and/or national competition regulations and as set forth in the
inspection report.
FIS and national courses not re-inspected by the end of the 5-year, or 10-year interval are
deleted from FIS and U.S. Ski & Snowboard listings of approved courses.
The re-inspection process requires an on-site inspection and completion of the appropriate
inspection form, FIS or national, and the associated documentation/exhibits. The inspector
will determine whether improvements are necessary.
Homologation Fees and Inspectors’ Expenses
The application form and fees, can be found at usskiandsnowboard.org.
Fees for both FIS and national homologation are payable to ‘Alpine Course Approvals’
and shall be remitted with the application when sent to Competition Services. The FIS fee is
required for each event on the same trail. A single national fee may cover a GS and SL on the
same trail.
155
Inspectors’ Expenses - FIS and U.S. Ski & Snowboard
Course inspectors’ expenses, for both FIS and national homologation and re-homologation,
are reimbursed directly by the requesting or responsible area, club or race organization, as
indicated on the application requesting homologation, to the inspector upon presentation of an
expense statement and/or voucher. In addition to expenses (travel, meals, etc.) inspectors are
paid a rate of $180 per day for both FIS and national inspections. Inspectors are paid for travel
days of four hours or greater as well as inspection days. Should the applicant not provide the
required course documentation as outlined in article 650 the inspector may charge additional
fess up to the FIS per day limit per report.
156
CONCUSSION CHECKLIST
Signs and Symptoms
Athletes who show or report one or more of the signs and symptoms listed below, or simply
say they just “don’t feel right” after a bump, blow, or jolt to the head or body, may have a
concussion or more serious brain injury.
Action Plan
If you suspect that an athlete has a concussion
1. Remove the athlete from training and competition,
2. Provide athlete/family with U.S. Ski & Snowboard’s concussion information and
medical evaluation forms,
3. Notify je[email protected] of suspected concussion,
4. The athlete will be placed on U.S. Ski & Snowboard medical hold until the completed
medical evaluation form is received with the signature of a medical professional who has
been trained in concussion management within the past three years.
More Information
cdc.gov/HeadsUp
Signs Observed by
Coaches / Ocials
Can’t recall events prior to or
after a hit or fall
Appears dazed or stunned
Forgets an instruction
Moves clumsily
Answers questions slowly
Loses consciousness
(even briey)
Shows mood, behavior, or
personality changes
Symptoms Reported by
Athlete
Headache or "pressure" in head
Nausea or vomiting
Balance problems or dizziness
Double or blurry vision
Bothered by light or noise
Feeling sluggish, hazy,
foggy or groggy
Confusion, or concentration
or memory problems
Just not “feeling right”
or feeling down
